UCCS PUB RENOVATION 1420 AUSTIN BLUFFS PARKWAY Colorado Springs, Colorado 80918 100% BID DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANUAL Divisions 01 through 33 HB&A 102 East Moreno Avenue Colorado Springs, CO 80903 March 15, 2010 UCCS PUB RENOVATION 1420 Austin Bluffs Parkway Colorado Springs, Colorado 80918 100% Bid Documents PROJECT MANUAL Table of Contents (Divisions 01 through 33) Project Directory DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section Title 010000 010100 010200 010210 010260 010300 010410 010450 010600 010750 011000 011210 012000 013000 014000 015000 015800 016000 017000 017100 017200 017300 018115 General Requirements Summary of Work Administration and Supervision Allowances Unit Prices Alternates Project Coordination Cutting and Patching Regulatory Requirements Specification System Special Project Procedures Hazardous Material Procedures Project Meetings Submittals, Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples Quality Control Temporary Facilities Project Identification Sign Material and Equipment Contract Close-Out Cleaning Project Record Document Operating and Maintenance Mechanical and Electrical Coordination DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 020700 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE (Not Used) DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 042113 Brick Masonry DIVISION 05 – METALS 057400 Metal Foot Railings TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - 1 DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork 066400 Plastic Paneling DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 078446 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems 079200 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081416 Flush Wood Doors 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 092900 Gypsum Board 093000 Tiling 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring 096813 Tile Carpeting 097200 Wall Coverings 099123 Interior Painting DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 101400 Signage 102600 Wall and Door Protection DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 113250 Visual Mounting Equipment 114000 Foodservice Equipment Attachment: United Restaurant Supply, Inc., Specifications UCCS_Pub 115213 Projection Screens DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 123640 Stone Countertops DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used) DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (Not Used) DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 212300 Ansul Fire Protection Systems DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 220000 Plumbing 220007 Plumbing Insulation TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - 2 DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230000 Basic Requirements 230500 Basic Materials & Methods 230593 Testing, Adjusting, & Balancing 230700 HVAC Insulation 233000 Air Distribution 233410 Exhaust Fans 233616 Air Terminal Units - Variable Volume DIVISION 25– INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 250000 Building Systems Controls DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 260000 Basic Requirements 260519 Wiring Methods 262200 Transformers 262416 Panelboards 262426 Wiring Devices 262816 Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 262913 Motor Controllers 265100 Interior Lighting DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 270000 Communications DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (Not Used) DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK (Not Used) DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (Not Used) DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES (Not Used) END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PROJECT DIRECTORY OWNER COMPANY Names Address City/State ZIP code Office Phone Emails UCCS Facilities Services Carolyn Fox, University Architect 1420 Austin Bluffs Parkway Colorado Springs, Colorado 80903 719.255.3588 cfox3@uccs.edu ARCHITECT COMPANY HB&A Names Mike Richardson, Project Architect Jeff Finn, Architectural Intern 102 East Moreno Avenue Colorado Springs, Colorado 80903 719.473.7063 mike.richardson@hbaa.com Jeff.finn@hbaa.com Address City/State ZIP code Office Phone Emails INTERIOR DESIGNER COMPANY SENGER DESIGN GROUP, INC. Names Cindy Senger, Principal Jocelyn Downing, Interior Designer 523 South Cascade Avenue, Suite B Colorado Springs, Colorado 80903 719.522.1520 csenger@sengerdesigngroup.com jdowning@sengerdesigngroup.com Address City/State ZIP code Office Phone Emails MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/PLUMBING ENGINEER COMPANY Names Address City/State ZIP Code Office Phone Emails PROJECT DIRECTORY SOL CHAVEZ & ASSOCIATES, INC. Coy J Brandenburg, Principal / Senior Project Manager Mike McShea 119 West Cucharras St. Colorado Springs, Colorado 80903 719.636.0021 coy@solchavezpe.com mike@solchavezpe.com Page - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SPECIFICATIONS CONSULTANT COMPANY SPECIFICATIONS BY DESIGN Contact Address Mike Kerns 1410 Grant Street Suite B203 Denver, Colorado 80203 303.320.9385 303.320.9387 mike@specbydesign.com City/State Zip Code Office Phone Fax Number Email End of Project Directory PROJECT DIRECTORY Page - 2 SECTION 01 00 00 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS Division 1 - General Requirements shall govern work under all Divisions of the Specifications. 1.02 SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE EXPLANATION Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and include incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall," "in conformity therewith," "shall be," "as noted on the Drawings," "a," "the" are intentional. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference in same manner as they are when "NOTE" occurs on Drawings. Supply words "shall be" or "shall" by inference when colon is used within sentences or phrases. Supply words "on the Drawings" by inference when "as indicated" is used with sentences or phrases. Where reference is made to specifications, societies, institutes, or associations or manufacturer's directions, they are, except as may be inconsistent herewith, made part of specifications, to same extent as if written out in full herein. Use latest edition, at time of bidding, if a date is not given. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS References in Contract Documents to trade associations, technical societies, recognized authorities and other institutions include following organizations, which are sometimes referred to only by corresponding abbreviations: AA AAMA ACI AIMA AISC AISI AITC AMA ANSI APA ASHRAE ASTM AWI AWPA AWS CDA CM/GC CRA CRSI CS DFPA EPA FGMA FIA FM FS MIA GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Aluminum Association Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association American Concrete Institute Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association (successor to AMA) American Institute of Steel Construction American Iron and Steel Institute American Institute of Timber Construction Acoustical Materials Association American National Standards Institute (successor to USASI and ASA) American Plywood Association American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers American Society for Testing Materials Architectural Woodwork Institute American Wood Preservers Association American Welding Society Copper Development Associations, Inc. Construction Manager/General Contractor California Redwood Association Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) Douglas Fir Plywood Association Environmental Protection Agency Flat Glass Marketing Association Factory Insurance Association Factory Mutual Engineering Division Federal Specification Marble Institute of America 010000 - 1 SECTION 01 00 00 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MIL MILMA NAAMM NBFU NBS NCMA NEC NEMA NFPA NIOSH NMWIA NPVLMA NTMA OSHA PCA PCI PEI PS SCPI SDI SJI SMACNA SPA SPI SPR SSPC SWI TCA UL WCLA WRI WWPA 1.04 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Military Specification Metal Lath Manufacturer's Association The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers National Board of Fire Underwriters National Bureau of Standards National Concrete Masonry Association National Electric Code (of NBFU) National Electrical Manufacturers' Association National Fire Protection Association National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health National Mineral Wool Insulation Association National Paint, Varnish and Lacquer Manufacturers' Association The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association Occupational Safety and Health Administration Portland Cement Association Prestressed Concrete Institute Porcelain Enamel Institute Product Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) Structural Clay Products Institute Steel Deck Institute Steel Joist Institute Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association Southern Pine Association The Society of Plastic Industry, Inc. Simplified Practice Recommendation (U.S. Department of Commerce) Steel Structures Painting Council Steel Window Institute Tile Council of America Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. West Coat Lumbermen's Association Wire Reinforcement Institute Western Wood Products Association LAYING OUT WORK The Contractor will furnish reference bench mark and maintain bench mark and all other grades, lines, and levels and dimensions as indicated in the Contract Documents. Report any errors or inconsistencies in above to Owner before commencing work. Except as delegated by subcontract or normal trade practice, the Contractor will be responsible for all lines, elevations, and measurements of work indicated. 1.05 EXAMINATION OF SITE Failure to visit the site will in no way relieve any Contractor from the necessity of furnishing materials or performing work that may be required to complete work in accordance with the Contract Documents without additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 2 SECTION 01 01 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA The following Drawings, Project Manual, and Addenda from the Contract Documents. A. Set(s) of Drawings & project manuals dated March 15, 2010. Drawing list is as follows: Sheet No. AC-1.0 AC-1.1 AD-1.0 A-1.0 A-1.1 A-8.0 A-8.1 I-0.0 I-1.0 I-1.1 I-2.0 I-2.1 MD-1.0 MD-1.1 M-1.0 M-1.1 PD-1.0 P-1.0 P-1.1 ED-1.1 ED-1.2 E-1.0 E-2.1 E-2.2 FS-1 1.02 B. Project Manual titles: UCCS Pub Renovation Project Manual dated March 15, 2010. C. Addenda: All Addenda issued prior to bidding. WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. 1.03 Titled Existing Code Plan Proposed Code Plan Demolition Plans Proposed Plans Enlarged Kitchen Plans Wall Sections and Details Door and Window Details Cover Sheet Furniture/Reference Plan Finish Plan/Interior Finish Specs Interior Elevations Interior Sections and Details Mechanical Demo Plan Mechanical Piping Demo Plan Mechanical Schedules, Notes, Details Mechanical New Work Plans Plumbing Demo Plans Plumbing Schedules, Notes, Details Plumbing New Work Plans Electrical Lighting Demo Plan Electrical Power Demo Plan Electrical Schedules, Notes, Details Electrical Lighting Plan Electrical Power Plan Food Service Floor Plan and Schedule Work covered: Work under this contract includes all materials, equipment and labor necessary to complete the work indicated on the drawings, described in specifications, addenda or reasonably inferred. CONTRACTORS All work will be executed under one prime construction contract between the Owner and the Contractor. Except as indicated otherwise, all work under this contract will be under the direction of the prime contractor. SUMMARY OF WORK 010210 - 1 SECTION 01 01 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK 1.04 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado JOB CONDITIONS A. Areas of the building immediately adjacent to areas under construction will be occupied by the public during the work of this project. Conduct the work of this project in a manner that will minimize disruption of the Owner's occupancy of adjacent areas. B. Do not interrupt building access and use, except as permitted by the Owner. Provide fourteen (14) work days notice to the Owner of construction activities which will severely impact the occupancy and use of adjacent areas. C. Provide temporary barriers and/or partitions as required to protect the occupants of the building and the general public from injury due to the work of this project; and/or to protect adjacent areas of the building from the spread of dust and dirt caused by the work or this project. Remove temporary barriers and partitions upon completion of the Project. 1. Temporary partitions shall be constructed of 1/2" plywood on the construction face nominal 2" X 4" wood studs and 1/2" gypsum wallboard on the public occupied face. D. 1.05 Do not interrupt power, lighting, plumbing, telephone and HVAC services to occupied areas without Owner's approval. Such interruptions must be scheduled at least eight (8) work days in advance and have Owner's approval. PROTECTION OF WORK AND ADJACENT PROPERTY A. Buildings and property adjacent to work included in this project may be subject to damage due to construction operations. Prior to the start of the work included in this Contract engage the services of a photographer to record the existing condition of adjacent structures and property. Contractor shall provide one set of 3" X 5" prints or a set on disk to the Owner and retain negatives and one set of prints for their records. Sufficient photos with adequate detail to thoroughly document the conditions surrounding the work shall be provided. B. At the completion of the project, Contractor shall restore existing buildings, landscaping, parking facilities and property to same condition as prior to the start of the work. C. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, the Contractor shall: 1. Notify, in writing, the Owner of University or private property which interferes with the work and arrange with them for disposition of such property. 2. Provide temporary protection around openings through and at floors, roofs, and other openings. 3. Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing underground utilities, sewers, etc., encountered during excavation work, to protect them from collapse or other type of damage until such time as they are to be removed, incorporated into the work of this project, or can be properly back-filled upon completion of new work. 4. 5. SUMMARY OF WORK Weather Protection: Provide protection against rain, snow, wind, ice, storms, or heat so as to maintain work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage. At the end of each day's work, cover new work likely to be damaged. Provide and maintain adequate protection of the work from damage due to freezing, especially freezing earth and soils. Risk of proceeding with the work on or with freezing or frozen materials will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 010210 - 2 SECTION 01 01 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK 6. 7. 1.06 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Water Protection: Provide protection from damage at all times from rain water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and other water. Provide pumps and equipment enclosures to provide this protection. The Contractor will maintain free of obstructions and debris, all designated corridors and emergency exits, handicap access ramps and sidewalks to building. Provide temporary directional handicapped signage for routing to the nearest accessible facilities. EXISTING FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT The Owner will remove or relocate existing movable furniture and equipment from the areas in which the Contractor is working. Notify the Owner not less than three days prior to starting work in areas where furniture and equipment require moving. 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S ACCESS PARKING AND STAGING AREAS A. Work included in this project will need to be performed within the limitations of available access at the site. The University shall limit the area available for staging and parking due to the additional number of construction projects planned during the execution of this contract. Contractor shall adjust the means and methods of construction to allow for the restrictions surrounding the site. B. All parking on campus is under control and authority of the Department of Public Safety (DPS) of the University. 1. Types of parking and staging are defined as follows: General Staging Areas are approved areas adjacent to the site when available or in University designated group staging yards. General Staging Areas may be used for any purpose, including employee parking, on a space available basis, but must be coordinated through the UCCS Project Manager and DPS. Vehicles may not park outside of general staging areas except in areas coordinated and approved by DPS. Restricted Staging Areas are approved areas near the site for the construction dumpster, off-loading of equipment, contractor’s work trailer, and materials that are soon to be incorporated into the work. No vehicles shall park in a restricted staging area for more than 20 minutes between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. weekdays. Contractor Employee Parking are areas for workers needing parking on campus. Coordinate through UCCS Project Manager and DPS. Prohibited Parking are areas designated in the Contract Documents as No Parking areas. The contractor shall not allow any parking in areas so designated under any circumstance. C. The restrictions in this Section are in addition to any other restrictions or rules provided by DPS. 1. Fees shall be assessed for the use of any PTS facility for staging and construction activities. D. The designated staging area for this project shall be: The open area concrete and landscaped areas outside of the existing Pub, but staging activities may not block exit doors. The contractor shall protect all trees located within the staging areas to the drip line of the trees. Sod and planting beds within the staging areas shall be restored to a “like-new” condition upon completion of the work. SUMMARY OF WORK 010210 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 01 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK 1.08 1.09 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Owner may occupy designated areas for the purpose of storage of furnishings and equipment and installation of equipment. B. Execute Certificate of Substantial Completion for each designated portion of work prior to Owner occupancy. Contractor shall allow: 1. Access for Owner personnel. 2. Use of parking facilities. 3. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems. C. On occupancy, Owner will provide, for occupied areas: 1. Operation of HVAC and electrical systems. 2. Maintenance. 3. Security. CONSTRUCTION AND SEQUENCE SCHEDULE: A. 1.10 In order to accommodate the uninterrupted operation of the existing building during the various phases of construction, the sequence of construction operations shall be as follows: 1. The sequence concept is to: (1) prepare the existing facility to function during renovation through completion; (2) thence occupy the newly remodeled portion; and (3) upon completion, finally reoccupy the remodeled portions. 2. Utilizing this concept break down the Schedule into broad scope categories augmented by “Owner Action” and “Contractor action” columns that indicate coordination tasks which define the various phases of the work. 3. The intent of the categorization is to generally summarize the nature and extent of work to be performed without in any way limiting specific requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Some overlapping between the several construction operation will occur, and where possible, permission may be granted to start certain portions of the work before the previous operations were completed in their entirety. Such detail scheduling shall be done as the work in progresses, provided that the Owner’s operations remain uninterrupted, but in all cases must receive Owner approval. 5. Where it may not be possible to complete certain mechanical and electrical services in connection with making the work complete and ready for occupancy, temporary services as directed and as approved shall be installed to permit occupancy by the Owner at the earliest possible date. 6. The construction sequence schedule and related drawings are intended to aid the Contractor in bidding and in the preparation of a specific construction schedule. Deviations of sequence may be made upon approval of the Owner and the Architect. The preparation of a specific construction schedule remains the responsibility of the Contractor TEMPORARY ELECTRIC SERVICE A. Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt owners need for continuous service. Owner to pay for power consumed. Provide power outlets for construction operations, branch wiring, distribution boxes, and flexible power cords as required. END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF WORK 010210 - 4 SECTION 01 02 00 – ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. 1.02 SURVEYS, LAYOUTS, AND LEVELS A. 1.03 Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions of the Contract SC 6.23 Revision 1/2009 and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. General: Working from lines and levels established by the existing building, and as shown in relation to the work, establish and maintain bench marks and other dependable markers to set the lines and levels for the work of construction as needed to properly locate every element of the work of the entire project. Calculate and measure required dimensions as shown (within recognized tolerances if not otherwise indicated); do not scale the drawings to determine dimensions. Continuously advise tradesmen performing the work of the marked lines and levels provided for use in the layout of work. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at job site, one copy of: 1. Contract Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Reviewed Shop Drawings 5. Change Orders 6. Other Modifications to Contract 7. Field Test Records 8. As-Built Drawings B. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition and do not use record documents for construction purposes. Make documents available at all times for inspection by the Consultant and Owner. C. Label each document "Project Record" in 1" or larger printed letters. D. Record drawing information in colored pencil with different colors for the various systems and defined by color legend. E. Record drawings and specifications shall include the following: 1. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. Location of concealed valves, dampers, controls, balancing devices, junction boxes, clean-outs, and other items requiring access or maintenance. 2. Field changes of dimension and detail, changes made by Change Order or Field Order and details not on original contract drawings. 3. Fire protection and alarm systems shop drawings. ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION 010200 - 1 SECTION 01 02 00 – ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION F. 1.04 1.05 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Submit all record drawings to the Consultant at the completion of the project. CLEANING A. Cleaning and Protection Work: At the time each unit of work or element of the construction is completed (substantially) in each area of the Project, clean the unit or element to a condition suitable for occupancy and use (as intended), and restore minor or superficial damage. Replace units and elements which are damaged beyond successful restoration. Clean and restore adjoining surfaces and other work which was soiled or damaged (superficially) during the installation; replace other work damaged beyond successful restoration. Where the performance of subsequent work could possibly result in damage to the complete unit or element, provide protective covering or other provisions to minimize possible damage. Repeat cleaning and protection operations during remainder of construction period, wherever work might otherwise be damaged by sustained soiling or exposure. B. During Construction: Oversee cleaning and ensure that building, grounds, and public properties are maintained free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish. At reasonable intervals during daily progress of work, clean up site and access and dispose of waste materials, rubbish, and debris. Vacuum clean interior building areas when ready and continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until building is ready for acceptance or occupancy. PROJECT SIGN Erect no project sign or job-site sign of any kind, except warning signs as specified in Section 01500, without written authorization of the Owner. 1.06 1.08 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work so as not to interfere with the building custodian's normal cleanup activities. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all the work of the project. The Contractor shall coordinate the efforts of all subcontractor(s) and the deliveries of suppliers so that the work progresses in an orderly fashion without delay towards timely completion of a complete project in accordance with the drawings and specifications. C. The Contractor shall note that concurrent with his work, other contractors, suppliers, and the Owner's facilities and maintenance personnel may be working in relatively close proximity. The Contractor will be solely responsible for coordinating his work with that of other contractors and will make no claims for failure to do so. METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION A. The procedure and method of construction is the prerogative and the responsibility of the Contractor. If professional assistance is required to safely implement method of construction, the Contractor shall, on his own, employ professional help. END OF SECTION ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION 010200 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 03 00 – ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL ALTERNATE REQUIREMENTS A. 1.02 General: The description for each alternate is recognized to be incomplete and abbreviated but implies that each change must be complete for the scope of work affected. Refer to applicable sections and to applicable drawings for the specific requirements of the owner, whether or not references are so noted in the description of each alternate. Modify surrounding work as required to integrate with the work of each alternate. SPECIFIC ALTERNATES A. Add Alternates: 1. Provide alternate price for 3 keg cooler unit, refer Food Service sheets. 2. Provide add alternate price for a second 50 lb fryer unit, refer Food Service sheets. 3. Provide alternate price to use epoxy grout at all quarry tile locations. END OF SECTION ALTERNATES 010300 - 1 SECTION 01 04 10 – PROJECT COORDINATION University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 SUMMARY A. General Contractor is responsible for all of the work of this contract. 1. Assign and subcontract portions of the work as required to assure that all work is constructed in compliance with these documents. 2. Coordinate the work of the several subcontractors for the project. 3. Coordinate work of this contract with work by separate contractors. B. Each subcontractor shall: 1. Coordinate work of his own employees and subcontractors. 2. Expedite his work to assure compliance with schedules. 3. Coordinate his work with that of other subcontractors and work by separate contractor. 4. Comply with orders and instructions of owner. C. Related Requirements 1. All Division 1 Sections. CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION AND START-UP A. Establish on-site lines of authority and communications. 1. Attend pre-construction meeting with subcontractors upon commencement of the project. 2. Establish procedures for intra-project communications. a. Submittals. b. Reports and records. c. Recommendations. d. Coordination Drawings. e. Schedules. f. Resolution of conflicts. 3. Interpret Contract Documents. a. Consult with Architect to obtain interpretation. b. Assist in resolution of questions or conflicts which may arise. c. Transmit written interpretations to subcontractors, and to other concerned parties. 4. 5. Assist in obtaining permits and approvals. a. Obtain building permits and special permits required for work or for temporary facilities. b. Verify that subcontractors have obtained inspections for work and for temporary facilities. Control the use of site. a. Supervise field engineering and site layout. b. Allocate space for each subcontractor's use for field offices, sheds, work and storage areas. c. Establish access, traffic and parking allocations and regulations. d. Monitor use of site during construction. PROJECT COORDINATION 010410 - 1 SECTION 01 04 10 – PROJECT COORDINATION 1.03 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado CONTRACTOR DUTIES A. Construction Schedules. 1. Coordinate schedules with several subcontractors. 2. Monitor schedules as work progresses. a. Identify potential variances between schedules and probable completion dates for each phase. b. Recommend adjustments in schedule to meet required completion dates. c. Adjust schedules of subcontractors as required. d. Document changes in schedule. 3. Observe work of each subcontractor to monitor compliance with schedule. a. Verify that labor and equipment are adequate for the work and the schedule. b. Verify that product procurement schedules are adequate. c. Verify that product deliveries are adequate to maintain schedule. B. Process Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 1. Review for compliance with Contract Documents. a. Field dimensions and clearance dimensions. b. Relation to available space. c. Relation to other trades, equipment and systems. d. Submit to Architect. C. Monitor the use of temporary utilities. 1. Verify that adequate services are provided and maintained. D. Inspection and Testing. 1. Inspection work to assure performance in accord with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Administer special testing and inspections of suspected work. 3. Reject work which does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Coordinate testing laboratory services. a. Verify that required laboratory personnel are present. b. Verify that tests are made in accordance with specified standards. c. Review test reports for compliance with specified criteria. d. Recommend and administer required retesting. E. Monitor contractor's periodic cleaning. 1. Enforce compliance with specifications. 2. Resolve any conflicts. F. Coordinate changes. 1. Recommend necessary or desirable changes. 2. Assist owner in negotiating change orders. 3. Promptly notify all subcontractors of pending changes. G. Maintain Reports and Records at Job Site available to Architect and Subcontractors. 1. Log progress of work of each subcontractor. 2. Records a. Contracts. b. Purchase orders. PROJECT COORDINATION 010410 - 2 SECTION 01 04 10 – PROJECT COORDINATION 3. 4. H. 1.04 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado c. Materials and equipment records. d. Applicable handbooks, codes and standards. Obtain information from subcontractors and maintain file of Project Record Documents. Assemble documentation for handling of claims and disputes. Coordinate work of this Contract and requirements of this section with work Contract including but not limited to: 1. Removal of asbestos containing materials by separate contract. by Separate CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Coordinate equipment start-up. 1. Provide seven days notification prior to start-up of each item. 2. Ensure that each piece of equipment or system is ready for operation. 3. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible persons in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Perform required testing and balancing. 5. Record dates of start of operation of systems and equipment. Submit written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 6. Provide written notice of beginning of warranty period for equipment put into service. B. Demonstration and Instructions 1. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, seasonal operation, and shutdown of each item of equipment. C. At completion of work of each Section, conduct an inspection to assure that 1. Specified cleaning has been accomplished. 2. Temporary facilities have been removed from site. D. At completion 1. Conduct an inspection to list work to be completed or corrected. 2. Supervise correction and completion of work as established in Certificate of Completion. E. When a portion of the Project is occupied prior to final completion, coordinate established responsibilities of each subcontractor. F. Final completion. 1. When each Subcontractor determines that work is finally complete, conduct an inspection to verify completion of work. 2. Assist owner and architect in inspection. G. Administer contract closeout. 1. Receive and review Subcontractor's final submittals. 2. Transmit to architect with recommendation for action. END OF SECTION PROJECT COORDINATION 010410 - 3 SECTION 01 04 50 – CUTTING AND PATCHING University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: This section establishes general requirements in addition to those indicated in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction pertaining to cutting, fitting, and patching of the work required to: 1. Make the several parts fit properly. 2. Uncover work to provide for installation, inspection, or both, of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Patch new construction into existing construction. B. Related Work: 1. In addition to requirements specified, upon the Consultant's request, uncover work to provide for inspection of covered work, and remove samples of installed materials for testing. 2. Do not cut or alter work performed under separate contract without the Consultant's written permission. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform all cutting and patching in strict accordance with pertinent requirements of the Specifications and, in the event no such requirements are determined, in conformance with the Consultant's written direction. 1. Use skilled workmen to perform all cutting and patching work. 2. Use methods least likely to damage existing surfaces and materials to remain, while providing proper surfaces to receive installation of repair, patching, and/or new work. B. Visual Quality: 1. Do not cut and patch work exposed to public view, and the exterior and/or interior of the building in a manner that will result in an unacceptable appearance as determined by the Consultant. 2. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that will result in obvious appearance that cutting and patching work was done. 3. When cutting existing structural concrete, do not extend saw cuts beyond the corners of the required opening on either side of the opening. EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A. 1.04 Where cutting and patching of existing construction is required; prior to start of work, inform Owner of existing construction to be disturbed. Owner will determine if elements of existing construction contain asbestos. Do not proceed with work until after Owner has examined areas to be disturbed. SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposed cutting and patching procedures in writing for the following categories of work prior to proceeding with this work: CUTTING AND PATCHING 010450 - 1 SECTION 01 04 50 – CUTTING AND PATCHING 1. 2. B. University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Cutting new openings in existing structural concrete walls, parapets, and suspended slabs. Cutting new openings in existing roofs and roofing materials. Submittals shall comply with Section 01300. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated in pertinent sections of these specifications, or as directed by the Consultant, use materials which are identical to existing materials in workmanship, appearance, and performance. B. If identical materials are not available, match existing as closely as possible, especially existing visual characteristics. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 3.02 INSPECTION A. Before proceeding, inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting, excavating, backfilling, and patching. B. After uncovering the work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new work. C. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated or if existing construction is not as indicated on the Drawings, immediately notify the Consultant for further instructions. PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing, and support as required to maintain structured integrity of the project. B. Take all necessary action required to protect adjacent existing surfaces from damage due to the work of this section. C. Take all precautions necessary to protect existing surfaces and materials, new work, and the work of this section from damage due to adverse weather conditions. D. Provide temporary support of work to cut and adjacent work to prevent failure or damage due to the work of this section. E. Properly prepare substrate surfaces exposed during cutting as required to receive the work of this or other sections of these specifications in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. CUTTING AND PATCHING 010450 - 2 SECTION 01 04 50 – CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.03 3.04 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado EXECUTION A. Perform all required cutting and patching as required or reasonably implied under pertinent sections of these specifications. B. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and will provide proper finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. PERFORMANCE A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new work. Saw-cut and otherwise isolate areas to be demolished. B. Repair or otherwise rebuild and/or construct all surfaces affected by cutting and demolition. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide totally finished installation to comply with tolerances, finishes, and profiles of adjacent surfaces, whether new or existing. C. Restore work which has been cut or exposed by demolition; install new construction in compliance with specifications for type of new work to be done or as required to match existing adjacent surfaces. In no case shall any exposed existing surface be left in a raw, marred, or unfinished surface. D. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish. 1. Continuous Surfaces: To nearest intersections. 2. Assembly: Entire refinishing. END OF SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING 010450 - 3 SECTION 01 06 00 – REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. 1.03 Section Includes: 1. General administrative requirements and procedures and related applicable codes. APPROVAL AND RECOMMENDATION AGENCIES: A. 1.04 Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions of the Contract SC 6.23 Revision 1/2009 and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. The University of Colorado at Colorado Springs has jurisdiction for the interpretation and enforcement of code requirements for construction of projects. CODES: A. All Contractors shall comply with all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations in effect at the time of bid openings. APPROVED STATE BUILDING CODES (updated July 2008) The following approved building codes and standards have been adopted by State Buildings Programs (SBP) as the minimum requirements to be applied to all state-owned buildings and physical facilities including capital construction and controlled maintenance construction projects. The 2006 edition of the International Building Code (IBC) (as adopted by the Colorado State Buildings Program as follows: Chapters 2-35 and Appendices C and I) The 2006 edition of the International Mechanical Code (IMC) (as adopted by the Colorado State Buildings Program as follows: Chapters 2-15 and Appendix A) The 2008 edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) (National Fire Protection Association Standard 70) (as adopted by the Colorado State Electrical Board) The 2006 edition of the International Plumbing Code (IPC) (as adopted by the Colorado Examining Board of Plumbers as follows: Chapter 1 Section 101.2,102, Chapters 2-13 and Appendices B, D, E, F and G) The 2006 edition of the International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) (as adopted by the Colorado Examining Board of Plumbers as follows: Chapter 1 Section 101,102, Chapters 2-8 and Appendices A, B, C and D) The National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) (as adopted by the Department of Public Safety/Division of Fire Safety as follows with editions shown in parentheses: NFPA-1 (2006), 11 (2005), 12 (2005), 12A (2004), 13 (2002), 13D (2002), 13R (2002), 14 (2003), 15 (2001), 16 (2003), 17 (2002), 17A (2002), 20 (2003), 22 (2003), 24 (2002), 25 (2002), 72 (2002), 409 (2004), 423 (2004), 750 (2003) and 2001 (2004)) The current edition of the Rules and Regulations Governing the Sanitation of Food Service Establishments (as adopted by the Department of Public Health and Environment/Colorado State Board of Health) REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 010600 - 1 SECTION 01 06 00 – REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado The 2003 edition of ICC/ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities (as adopted by the Colorado General Assembly as follows: CRS 9-5-101, as amended, for accessible housing) Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). In case of a conflict between references applicable codes, the one having the more stringent requirements shall govern. Where governing codes indicate that the drawings or specifications do not comply with the minimum requirements of the codes, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing an installation, which will comply with code requirements. Drawings and specifications shall be followed where they are superior to code requirements. Note: Additional codes, standards and appendices may be adopted by the state agencies and institutions in addition to the minimum codes and standards herein adopted by State Buildings Programs. 1. The 2006 edition of the IBC became effective on July 1 of 2007. Consult the state electrical and plumbing boards and the state boiler inspector and conveyance administrator and the Division of Fire Safety for adoption of current editions and amendments to their codes. 2. Projects should be designed and plans and specifications should be reviewed based upon the approved codes at the time of A/E contract execution. If an agency prefers to design to a different code such as a newer edition of a code that State Buildings Programs has not yet adopted, the agency must contact SBP for approval and then amend the A/E contract with a revised Exhibit D, Approved State Building Codes. Please note that the state plumbing and electrical boards enforce the editions of their codes that are in effect at the time of permitting not design. 3. The state’s code review agents, or the State Buildings Programs approved agency building official, shall review all documents for compliance with the codes stipulated herein. Note: The Department of Public Health and Environment, Division of Consumer Protection will review drawings for food service related projects. 4. This policy does not prohibit the application of various life safety codes as established by each agency for specific building types and funding requirements. NFPA 101 and other standards notwithstanding, approved codes will supersede where their minimum requirements are the most restrictive in specific situations. If a conflict arises, contact State Buildings Programs for resolution. 5. It is anticipated that compliance with the federal Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) and Colorado Revised Statutes Section 9-5-101 will be met by compliance with the 2006 International Building Code and ICC/ANSI A117.1. However, each project may have unique aspects that may require individual attention to these legislated mandates. 6. The 2003 edition of the International Building Code (IBC) is to be applied to factory-built nonresidential structures as established by the Division of Housing within the Department of Local Affairs. A. Referenced Codes 1. While not adopted in entirety, portions of the following codes are referenced in the International Building Code (IBC), the International Mechanical Code (IMC), the International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) the International Plumbing REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 010600 - 2 SECTION 01 06 00 – REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Code (IPC), and the International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC). These following codes would be applied as reference standards. 2006 International Fire Code (IFC) 2006 International Existing Building Code (IEBC) B. Referenced Standards The IBC, IMC, IECC, IPC and IFGC standards shall be utilized to provide specific, or prescriptive, requirements on how to achieve the requirements established in the code. These standards may be unique to the code or may be derived from other established industry standards. Recognized standards may also be used to show compliance with the standard of duty established by the code. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). In case of a conflict between references applicable codes, the one having the more stringent requirements shall govern. Where governing codes indicate that the drawings or specifications do not comply with the minimum requirements of the codes, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing an installation, which will comply with code requirements. Drawings and specifications shall be followed where they are superior to code requirements. 1.05 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA): A. The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for compliance on the job site to all applicable portions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act. The Contractor is responsible for other regulatory requirements as they relate to occupational Health and Safety requirements. For example, NIOSH, ANSI, and MSA. B. Protection of life, health and public welfare as it relates to the execution of the construction contract is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Owner’s Representative may, at their discretion, observe, inspect, or comment on plans, procedures, or actions employed at the project as they relate to safety of life, health or public welfare. If conditions are imposed by the Owner which interfere with, or imply actions detrimental to safety, written notice shall be returned to the Owner for action prior to affecting any unsafe conditions. C. Contractors shall use OSHA Lock Out / Tag Out procedures when working with energized equipment. D. All contractors entering confined spaces owned by CU or while conducting work under contract with CU shall develop a written program and utilize procedures that, at a minimum, comply with all federal, state and local confined space standards and all applicable regulatory requirements. Contractors shall, independent of the University, monitor the space to obtain their own data to ensure a safe entry and exit. Any data generated by a contractor’s confined space entry, should be provided to the Facilities Management confined Space Program Manager. E. When contractors perform work that may involve Facilities Management controlled permit required confined spaces, Facilities Management will: 1. Inform contractors of permit required confined spaces and that entry is allowed only after compliance with the confined space entry standard; 2. Require contractors planning to enter a confined space to provide the Facilities Management Confined Space Program Manager in charge of that space, 48-hour advance notice of such planned entry. The contractors entry will be in accordance with the current Occupational Safety and Health Administration confined space entry standard and a signed document stating such, shall be provided to the FM Confined Space Program Manager prior to entry. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 010600 - 3 SECTION 01 06 00 – REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS F. The FM Confined Space Program Manager, following receipt of notice of contractor planned entry, will: 1. Apprise contractor of the hazards identified in the confined space and of any prior experience that is documented on the space; 2. Appraise the contractor of any precautions or procedures that CU has implemented for the protection of workers in or near the confined space; 3. 4. 1.06 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Coordinate entry operations with the contractor when both Facilities Management and contractor personnel are working in or around the confined space; Debrief the contractor at the end of the entry operations regarding hazards confronted or created. HOT WORK PERMITS A. All contractors shall be required to obtained a Hot Work Permit, three (3) working days in advance, for work that involves welding, heat treating, grinding, thawing pipe, hot riveting, soldering and brazing, power driven fasteners and similar activities involving spark, flame or heat. Compliance with the requirements of the applicable fire code, the International Building Code, and NFPA Standard 51B are mandatory and all contractors performing hot work activities shall read and understand these code requirements. To obtain a current Hot Work Permit, go to website: http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/hotwork.html B. Contractors shall read and comply with the procedures and requirements for Fire Watch, Fire Alarm Interruption and Fire Suppression Interruption as found on the following websites: Fire Watch Procedures: http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/firewatch.html Fire Alarm and Detection System Interruption/Outage: http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/firealarmdetectsys.html Fire Suppression System Interruption/Outage: http://fm.colorado.edu/firesafety/firesupressionsystems.html C. No hot work shall be conducted in any campus facility without a hot work permit. Any person or firm who conducts hot work without a permit shall be fined one thousand dollars ($1,000) for each occurrence and their non-permitted activities shall be stopped immediately until they obtain a hot work permit. Contractor shall be responsible for any damages caused as a result of improper hot work activities or the work stoppage. D. Individuals or firms who obtain a permit shall fully read, understand and implement the requirements of the permit. Any person or firm who conducts hot work without the full implementation of the permit requirements shall be fined five hundred dollars ($500) the first time and one thousand dollars ($1,000) for subsequent occurrences. When the requirements of the hot work permit are not being implemented, the improper activities shall be stopped immediately until a hot work permit is obtained. Contractor shall be responsible for any damages caused as a result of improper hot work activities or the work stoppage. Any contractor who is found to be in non-compliance a third time, will not be allowed to work on campus until further notice by Facilities Management. E. The campus inspectors, project managers and fire marshal shall have the authority to stop improper or non-permitted hot work activities. F. The Contractor shall notify the UCCS Fire Alarm Supervisor to deactivate all smoke alarms in the vicinity of the work prior to any demolition and construction work activity. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the smoke alarm deactivation requirement and cause a false alarm and arrival of the Colorado Springs Fire Department shall be a $400 fine per occurrence. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 010600 - 4 SECTION 01 06 00 – REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.07 PERMITS A. 1.08 1.09 The contractor must post permit(s) in a prominent location at the jobsite including all inspection reports. The contractor shall have an updated set of contract documents available at the jobsite for all inspections. INSPECTIONS A. The Contractor must schedule all required inspections 48 hours in advance by calling UCCS Project Manager or directly contacting their designated inspectors. Inspectors will complete these inspections within 48 hours with the exception of weekends and state holidays. B. The contractor is required to arrange for the all inspections as required by the Building Inspection Record and CRS 24-30-1303 including but limited to Footings/Foundations, Concrete, Framing, Lath and Gypsum Board, Fire Resistant Penetrations, Mechanical/Energy Efficiency and Roofing. C. Re-inspections: A re-inspection fee may be assessed for each inspection or reinspection when such portion of work for which inspection is called is not complete or when corrections called for are not made. D. The Contractor will be responsible for all cost related to re-inspections and will be billed at the testing agency bill-out rate for re-inspections. UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO SEXUAL HARASSMENT POLICY A. 1.10 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Contractors should be aware of and review the University of Colorado at Colorado Springs policies that prohibit discrimination and harassment on the basis of race, color, national origin, sex, age, disability, creed, religion, sexual orientation or veteran status. These policies are located on the web at: http://www.uccs.edu/hr. Contractor personnel must adhere to these policies and conduct themselves in a manner that does not discriminate or harass as a result of interacting with an around the University of Colorado faculty, staff and students and visitors. FIRE ALARM INTERRUPTION A. Contractor shall contact UCCS Fire Alarm Systems Supervisor (Ron Honn) at 719-255-3201 prior to all interruptions or shutdowns of fire alarm systems. Interruptions or shutdowns shall be scheduled three (3) working days in advance with UCCS Department of Public Safety and UCCS Project Manager. Contractor shall provide a fire watch as directed by UCCS Fire Alarm Systems Shop during interruption or shutdown. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing nuisance alarm due to activities at their work site. Common sources of nuisance alarms are: 1. Smoke (soldering, welding, cooking, etc.) 2. Grinding 3. Dust (drilling, sweeping, canister vacuums, sand blasting, etc.) 4. Water leaking (plumbing leaks, overflows) 5. Water sprayed on or near detectors (pressure washing or cleaning with water) 6. Popcorn or other food burning in microwaves 7. Static electricity (covering or uncovering detectors) 8. Changing filters on air handling units (dust) 9. Steam (leaks, pressure pop-offs) 10. Broken or frozen sprinkler heads 11. Sprinkler drain valves turned by mistake 12. Vandalism Precautions to prevent nuisance alarms are: REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 010600 - 5 SECTION 01 06 00 – REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1. 2. 3. 4. 3. 4. University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado During construction projects, treat all buildings, except totally new construction, as though they were occupied buildings with live systems. Do not assume that all detectors are in plain sight. Contact University personnel for verification. Maintain dust control measures per UCCS Standards: a. Maintaining barriers b. Covering air returns c. Contact UCCS personnel before capping or disabling smoke detectors. Contractor to cap/disable smoke detector during work hours only. At end of each shift. All smoke detectors to be active and operational. d. Avoiding recirculation of dust or smoke through the building air handling system. Follow campus hot work procedures. Refer to specification Section 01060, paragraph 1.06. Do not expose fire alarm devices to water or extreme temperatures. Contact Alarm Systems Supervisor for any actions that affect fire detection, alarm, and suppression systems. END OF SECTION REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 010600 - 6 SECTION 01 07 50 – SPECIFICATION SYSTEM University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. 1.02 Work Included: 1. Specification system format. 2. Grammar (syntax) description. DESCRIPTION A. These specifications have been derived from automated specification systems, and include minor deviations from format and traditional writing forms. Such deviations must be recognized as a normal result of this production technique, and no other meaning will be implied or permitted. B. Imperative language of the technical sections is directed to the Contractor. The term "provide" used repeatedly in the text is defined to mean..."furnish and install, complete, in place and ready for operation and use unless specifically indicated otherwise." C. Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and include incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall" "in conformity therewith," "shall be," "as noted on the Drawings", "A", "The", are intentional. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference in same manner as they are when "Note" occurs on Drawings. Supply words "on the Drawings" by inference when "as indicated" is used with sentences or phrases. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION SPECIFICATION SYSTEM 010750 - 1 SECTION 01 10 00 – SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 1.03 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Remodel Work scheduling. 2. Construction sequence scheduling. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. An essential condition of this Contract shall be the scheduling and conduct of all phases of construction operations in such a manner that the Owner's operations and use of the existing buildings and campus shall be uninterrupted at all times, except for such limited interruption as is required and approved by the owner. B. Contractor shall repair at his own expense all damage done to Owner's property, unknown utilities and adjoining public property as a result of Contractor's construction activities. PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Access and use of site: 1. Contractor shall use the designated site access for material storage in such a manner that access to existing buildings and campus remain accessible at all times for use. 2. Confine operations to as limited a use of the existing building and campus as possible. A route of access to and from the work for employees shall be agreed upon and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that the agreed route is maintained in order to prevent unwarranted or unnecessary traffic through the existing buildings or site. B. Owner notice and approval: 1. All arrangements and scheduling in connection with the work of this Contract shall be made with and subject to the approval of the Consultant and the Owner. 2. All work under this Contract which will require interruption of service of the existing building shall be scheduled to suit the need and convenience of the Owner's operation, and arrangements shall be made with the Owner and the Architect at least eight (8) working days in advance of the start of such work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REMODELING A. Construction activities of all areas to be constructed in existing facilities shall be completely separated from the rest of the building by dust-proof enclosures erected by Contractor. B. All surfaces in existing facilities not indicated to be remodeled, or removal of existing items by any Contractor, shall be repaired by the responsible Contractor to match existing adjoining similar surfaces. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 011000 - 1 SECTION 01 10 00 – SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 3.02 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado CLEAN-UP A. All areas within existing facilities, which are not within enclosed areas to be constructed used for access to work areas shall be completely cleaned of all debris and made "broom-clean" at the end of each day's work. B. Dust, which permeates areas of existing facilities because of improperly constructed dust-proof barriers, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall employ the services of a professional cleaning company to clean any area outside of the designated construction dust barriers that are contaminated by Contractor’s operations. Completely clean all such areas to the satisfaction of the Owner at no additional cost. END OF SECTION SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 011000 - 2 SECTION 01 12 10 – HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. 1.02 1.03 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. General administrative requirements and procedures for Hazardous Communication Program. B. Related Sections: 1. Summary of Work: Section 01010. WORK BY OWNER: A. 1.04 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): 1. Copies of all material safety data sheets for all applicable products, including but not limited to; paint, adhesives, mastics, solvents, and finishes, etc., shall be retained on site by the Contractor for all applicable products used during the construction and/or remodeling work. Furnish copies of all MSDS’s to the Owner and Architect and include in the Project Record Document submittal. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. 1.06 Asbestos: 1. Where asbestos materials or other hazardous conditions are known to exist in locations affected by this project, remediation measures will be taken by the Owner under separate contract. The Contractor shall coordinate his sequence and schedule with that of the environmental remediation work. 2. In the event that the Contractor encounters any material on the site which is reasonably believed hazardous, which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall: a. Stop work immediately in affected areas. b. Report the condition in writing to the Department of Facilities Services Project Manager. c. Report the condition in writing to the Architect. d. Resume work only under the provisions of this section. SUBMITTALS: A. 1.05 Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions of the Contract SC 6.23 Revision 1/2009 and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. Asbestos containing materials may exist within the general project area where such materials are not expected to be disturbed during the work. The Contractor shall review the Environmental Health and Safety Environmental Site Assessment Form at the project site and become familiar with known asbestos and hazardous containing materials in the work areas. PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: A. Hazard Communication Requirements: 1. All Contractors are responsible for compliance with mandatory federal rules and regulations concerning Hazard Communication, including, but not limited to those regulations contained in 29 CFR 1910.1200 Hazard Communication, 1910.146 Confined Space, 1910.147 Lock-out Tag-out, 1910.1101 Asbestos, and 1926.62 Lead. Contractor and all subcontractors working at sites under the control of the Owner shall make available to the Architect, upon request, copies of the Hazard Communication Program used by their firm. In addition to this requirement, all regulations related to Multi- HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES 011210 - 1 SECTION 01 12 10 – HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado employer workplaces shall be adhered to. These regulations are found in 29 CFR 1910.1200, (e) (2) (I) through (e) (4) specifically: (e) (2) Multi-employer workplaces. Employers who produce, use, or store hazardous chemicals at workplace in such a way that employees of other employer(s) may be exposed (for example, employees of a construction contractor working on site) shall additionally ensure that the hazard communication programs developed and implemented under paragraph (e) include the following: (e) (2) (i) The methods the employer will use to provide the other employer(s) with a copy of the material safety data sheet, or to make it available at a central location in the workplace, for each hazardous chemical the other employer(s)’ employees may be exposed to while working; (e) (2) (ii) The methods the employer will use to inform the other employer(s) of any precautionary measures that need to be taken to protect employees during the workplace’s normal operating conditions and in foreseeable emergencies; and, (e) (2) (iii) The methods the employer will use to inform the other employer(s) of the labeling system used in the workplace (e) (3) The employer may rely on an existing hazard communication program to comply with these requirements, provided that it meets the criteria established in this paragraph (e). 2. (e) (4) The employer shall make the written hazard communication program available, upon request, to employees, their designated representatives, the Assistant Secretary and the Director, in accordance with requirements of 29 CFR 1910.20 (e). The referenced regulations were excerpted from 29 CFR 1910.1200. This excerpt shall not be relied upon for compliance with mandatory federal, state and local regulations. The Contractor shall comply with all such regulations and shall be solely liable for insuring that all requirements under applicable regulations are met. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. 3.02 Asbestos and Hazardous Materials Discovery: 1. The Contractor is cautioned to be alert to the possibility that his work may uncover asbestos- containing or hazardous materials. If suspected materials are found, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and stop all work in the area immediately. If the suspected materials prove to contain asbestos or hazardous materials, the Owner will arrange to have the materials abated in a timely manner. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS/EQUIPMENT REMOVAL: A. Definition: 1. Removal of hazardous materials/equipment is extremely dangerous. Hazardous materials/equipment is defined to include, but not limited to the following: a. Fume hoods b. Hood exhaust duct work c. Exhaust fans d. Laboratory casework and equipment e. PCB ballast’s HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES 011210 - 2 SECTION 01 12 10 – HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES f. g. B. Hazardous materials/equipment removal shall include the protection of personnel, material, environment and safe legal disposal of the equipment; and further includes the following: a. Notification of Project Administrator and appropriate Environmental Health and Safety Unit b. Proper protective clothing for personnel involved in the removal. c. Appropriate emergency and first aid facilities. d. Removal procedures shall be accomplished during minimal occupancy of the remainder of the building on the weekends or at night. Disposal: 1. All equipment related to the use, storage or processing of hazardous materials/equipment shall be removed and properly disposed of under the direct, full-time supervision of a qualified Laboratory Specialist fully conversant with the chemistry and properties of the material/equipment involved. Certification is required. Contractors are responsible for the removal of all hazardous materials/equipment and chemicals from the work site as well as proper disposal of all hazardous waste generated by their project. 2. 3.03 Mercury and Sodium Vapor Lights Adjacent material that could come in contact with workers or public. Protection: 1. C. University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Hazardous chemicals, waste, and other pollutants may not be discharged to the sanitary or storm sewer systems at anytime. Releases to the environment must be reported to CUPD/EH&S immediately. ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITIES A. Environmental and Safety Issues and Practices. Contractors working on the UCCS campus are required to comply with all applicable University, City, State and Federal environmental regulations and safety standards. Hazardous and regulated materials must be managed and disposed of properly. Work sites must control dust, debris and run-off, and pay special attention to preventing any pollutants from entering the storm sewer or surface water collection systems. These systems ultimately drain into our creeks and waterways. B. Contractor will be required to sign an Environmental Responsibilities form. The contractor is responsible for notifying all subcontractors of the responsibilities identified on the form. A copy of this form must be posted, throughout the duration of the project, in a visible area for all workers to see. END OF SECTION HAZARDOUS MATERIAL PROCEDURES 011210 - 3 SECTION 01 20 00 – PROJECT MEETINGS University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. The types and minimum requirements for project meetings are included but are not necessarily limited to the following categories: Pre-construction meeting Progress and Coordination meetings Specially called meetings B. The pre-construction meeting will be scheduled within fifteen days after date of Notice to Proceed, at a central site location designated by the Owner and convenient for all parties. 1. Attendance: a. Owner's Representative b. Consultant and his sub-consultants, as applicable c. Contractor's Superintendent d. Major Subcontractor(s) e. Others as appropriate 2. Suggested Agenda: a. Distribution and discussion of: List of major subcontractors and suppliers Projected construction schedules Critical work sequencing Major equipment deliveries and priorities Project Coordination Designation of responsible personnel b. Procedures and processing of: Field decisions Proposal requests Submittals Change Orders Applications for Payment c. Adequacy of Distribution of Contract Documents d. Procedure for Maintaining Record Documents e. Inspections C. The Architect/Engineer will: Record the minutes; including significant proceedings and decisions. D. The Contractor shall schedule and administer subcontractor and vendor pre-construction meetings throughout progress of the work. He will: 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meeting. 5. Record the minutes; including significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Representatives of Contractors, Subcontractors, and Suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 7. Use of Premises: Office, work, staging and storage areas Owner's requirements 8. Temporary construction Facilities, Utilities, Controls and Construction Aids 9. Safety, First-aid, Security and Housekeeping Procedures PROJECT MEETINGS 012000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 20 00 – PROJECT MEETINGS 10. 1.02 Administrative Procedures and Documents as Required by Owner PROGRESS AND COORDINATION MEETING The Contractor will schedule and administer job progress and coordination meeting at the site. A. Attendance: 1. Owner as needed 2. Consultant and his sub-consultants as needed 3. Subcontractor as appropriate to the agenda 4. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 5. Others B. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 2. Field observations, problems and conflicts. 3. Problems which impede Construction Schedule. 4. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 5. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 6. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 7. Coordination of schedules. 8. Progress and schedule during succeeding work period. 9. Review submittal schedules and expedite as required. 10. Maintenance of quality standards. 11. Pending changes and substitutions. 12. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. B. The Contractor or CM/GC shall record and distribute the minutes of all progress meetings throughout the construction period. C. The Architect/Engineer shall visit the site a minimum of once every two weeks. The Architect/Engineer shall average one site visit per week during construction. END OF SECTION PROJECT MEETINGS 012000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 30 00 – SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. 1.02 Submit shop drawings, product data and samples as required by various sections of the specifications. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shop Drawings: 1. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner. 2. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet, detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on drawings. B. Product Data: 1. Preparation: a. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. b. Show performance characteristics and capabilities. c. Show dimensions and clearances required. d. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 2. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams. a. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information that is not applicable to the work. b. Supplement Standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the work. C. Samples: 1. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: a. Functional characteristics of the product with integrally related parts and attachment devices. b. Full range of color, texture and pattern D. Mock-ups: 1. Provide complete mock-up of exterior materials to be incorporated into the work. a. Mock-up shall include a sample of all materials used in exterior construction, whether specified elsewhere or not in these documents, including but not limited to, masonry, stone, window systems, precast concrete, roof systems, flashing, sealants, masonry paving, paint and other readily visible materials. b. Secure Owner approval of mock-ups prior to ordering and placement of materials. Modify mock-ups as directed by the Architect or Owner until acceptable. c. Confirm exact mock-up(s) required by Owner prior to fabrication of mock-up(s). 2. Remove mock-up at the conclusion of the project or when directed by the Architect. a. Restore or finish site to finish condition indicated on the Drawings. E. Responsibilities of the Contractor: 1. Review shop drawings, product data, samples and project record drawings for specification performance prior to submission. SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 013000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 30 00 – SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 2. 3. Determine and Verify: a. Field measurements b. Field construction criteria c. Catalog numbers and similar data d. Conformance with specifications Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1.03 Notify the Consultant in writing, at the time of submission, of any deviations in the submittals for requirements of the Contract Documents. Begin no fabrication or work that requires submittals until return of submittals with Consultant's acceptance. Contractor’s responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Consultant’s review of submittals. Contractor shall stamp, sign or initial, and date each submittal to show compliance with the Contract Documents prior to submittal to the Consultant. SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work. B. Number of Submittals Required: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit five opaque reproductions. Three copies will be retained by the Consultant. 2. Product Data: Submit seven copies, three of which will be retained by the Consultant. 3. Samples: Submit the number stated in each specification section. C. Submittals shall contain: 1. Date of the submission and dates of any previous submissions. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contract identifications. 4. Names of: a. Contractor and Subcontractor(s), if applicable. b. Supplier c. Manufacturer 5. Identification of product with the specification section number. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 11. An 8"x3" blank space in lower right-hand corner for review stamps. D. Resubmission Requirements: 1. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Consultant and resubmit until accepted. 2. Shop drawings and product data: a. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. b. Indicate any changes that have been made, other than those requested by the Consultant. SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 013000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 30 00 – SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 3. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. E. Distribution: 1. Distribute reproductions of approved shop drawings and copies of product data to affected subcontractors and retain one copy for use at the job-site. 2. Distribute approved samples as directed. F. Consultant's Duties: 1. Review submittals with reasonable promptness and in accordance with schedule. 2. Review of separate item does not constitute review of an assembly in which item functions. 3. Affix stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements for resubmittal or acceptance of submittal. 4. Return submittals to the Contractor for distribution or for resubmission. G. Schedule of Values and pay applications: 1. Submit typed schedule on State Form SC7.2; Contractor's standard form or media-driven printout will be considered on request. 2. Format: Table of Contents of this Project Manual. 3. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. H. Schedule of Submittals: The Contractor shall submit the submittals required by the specifications. The Contractor shall develop a submittal schedule that confirms the submittals and the time frame for review by the consultants. I. Construction Schedule: 1. The Contractor shall submit a critical-path method (CPM) construction schedule prior to start of construction activities. The CPM schedule shall include notice to proceed, submittal activities, construction activities, change order work (when applicable), closeout, testing, demonstration, and acceptance. The CPM shall correlate specifically to the schedule of values line items and be cost loaded. Float, slack time, or contingency within the schedule (i.e., the difference in time between the project's early completion date and the required contract completion date), and total float within the overall schedule, is not for the exclusive use of either the principal representative or the Contractor, but is jointly owned by both and is a resource available to and shared by both parties as needed to meet contract milestones and the contract completion date. The Contractor will be required to submit an as-built progress CPM schedule with each progress billing. This CPM schedule will be the basis for making progress payments. The level of detail and quantity of work activities in the CPM schedule should be negotiated with the principal representative prior to starting construction. J. Progress Photos 1. The Contractor shall submit up to 12 - 3x4 inch progress photos with each progress payment. The photos should demonstrate the work in place and be dated with a short description of the photographed item. SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 013000 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 30 00 – SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES K. Coordination Drawings: 1. The Contractor shall submit coordination drawings with all mechanical, electrical, fire protection, and building monitoring systems prior to the Consultant review of any shop drawings or submittals for work in those trades. Approval of required shops and submittals must be obtained prior to starting work, and must be obtained prior to approval of pay applications of the work. The drawings shall be created to include all trades on a particular level of the building on one drawing. Identify conflicts between the systems or between the systems and architectural elements such as ceiling heights, ceiling types, or walls. Conduit routing for electrical, mechanical, energy management system, and security trades shall be included. Identify potential solutions to the conflicts for the Consultant and Owner to review during the submittal process. Revise the coordination drawings to show any comments made during the submittal review process, and reissue for use by all affected trades, Owner and Consultant. 2. The Coordination drawings shall include sectional coordination documents. Identify elevations of systems A.F.F. (above finish floor) and component dimensions. Show elevations whenever component changes height. L. Request for Information (RFI): 1. The Contractor will be responsible for submitting RFIs on AIA form G716 or similar. The RFI should identify in writing any unclear, inconsistent, or conflicting item in the documents that could not be answered by thorough review by the Contractor or subcontractors. The RFI should include a description of the item and a proposed solution. The RFI should indicate schedule or cost impact, if any. Contractor shall be required to submit cost or schedule impact within seven days of receipt of the RFI response. Each RFI shall be numbered in sequence. M. Weekly Logs: 1. The Contractor shall provide an updated RFI, change request, and submittal logs at weekly construction meetings. Contractor shall provide a 2-week detailed construction schedule at the weekly construction meeting. PART 2 - MATERIALS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 013000 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 40 00 – QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTAL TESTING If required, the following testing shall be performed at the expense of the contractor installing the material being tested: A. Material Substitution: Any tests of basic material or fabrication equipment offered as a substitute for specified item on which a test may be required in order to prove its compliance with the specifications. B. Mechanical/Electrical: Tests on mechanical and electrical systems required to insure their proper installation and operation. C. Any test that fails shall be paid for by the installing contractor subject to the following conditions: 1. Quantity and nature of tests will be determined by the Consultant. 2. All test shall be done in the presence of the Owner or his representative. 3. Proof of noncompliance will make the installing contractor liable for any corrective action which the Owner feels is prudent including complete removal and replacement of defective material. Nothing contained herein is intended to imply that the installing contractor does not have the right to have tests performed on any material at any time for his own information and job control so long as the Consultant or Owner does not assume responsibility for costs or for giving them consideration when appraising quality of materials. D. 1.02 The Consultant shall determine the type and number of tests to be performed on the project. TEST REPORTS Reports of all tests made by testing laboratories shall distributed by the testing laboratory as follows: 1 copy - Contractor 1 copy - Applicable supplier or subcontractor 1 copy - Owner 1 copy - Consultant Other copies - as directed 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM A. General: The contractor shall establish a quality control system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of all subcontractors, to ensure conformance to the Contract Documents for materials, workmanship, construction, finish, functional performance and identification. This control shall be established for all construction except where the Contract Documents provide for specific compliance tests by testing laboratories or Consultants employed by the Owner. The quality control system is the means by which the Contractor assures that construction complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Controls shall be adequate to cover all construction operations and should be keyed to the proposed construction schedule. QUALITY CONTROL 014000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 40 00 – QUALITY CONTROL 1.04 B. The Contractor shall designate a quality control representative on staff to review the work to insure compliance with the contract documents by weekly jobsite visits for observation. The designated employee shall not be involved in the performance of the work. The quality control representative shall review the work and make necessary corrections to bring the work into compliance prior to scheduling the Architect for the final punchlist review. C. Records: The Contractor shall maintain correct records on an appropriate form for all inspections and tests performed, instruction received from the Owner and actions taken as a result of those instructions. These records shall include evidence that the required inspections or tests have been performed (including type and number of inspections or tests, nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.) proposed or directed remedial action, and corrective action taken. The Contractor shall document inspections and tests as required by each Section of the Specifications. INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY SERVICES A. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent Testing Agency to perform the Inspections, special inspections, tests and other services when required by sections of the specification. Services shall be performed in accordance with requirements of governing authorities and with specified standards. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with Testing Agency personnel and shall furnish tools, sample of materials, design mixes, equipment and assistance as requested. 2. Contractor shall provide and maintain, for the sole use of the Testing Agency, adequate facilities for the safe storage and proper curing of concrete testing cylinders on the project site for the first 24 hours after casting as required by ASTM C 31, Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the field. 3. Contractor shall notify Testing Agency sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for completion of initial tests and proper assignment of inspection personnel. 4. Contractor shall notify the testing agency sufficiently in advance of cancellation of required testing operations. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for costs incurred due to the failure to provide such notice. END OF SECTION QUALITY CONTROL 014000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. 1.03 This section of the General Requirements outlines the basic requirements for temporary services, utilities, and facilities which will indirectly enable adequate construction progress and processes, and will accommodate other necessary activities at the project site except as otherwise indicated, the costs of providing and using temporary services are included in the Contract Sum. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.04 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. Comply with governing regulations and utility company regulations and recommendations for the construction of temporary facilities, including but not necessarily limited to, code compliance, permits, inspections, testing, and health and safety compliance. SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide Temporary facilities and services at the time first needed at the site and maintain, expand, and modify the facilities as needed throughout the construction period and do not remove until no longer needed. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. 2.02 Use qualified tradesmen for the installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the total project construction work adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the work. Relocate, modify, and extend facilities as required during the course of the work to properly accommodate the entire work of the project. TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Temporary Water: Connect to existing water source as designated by the Owner for construction operations. B. Temporary Telephone: Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. If a mobile phone is designated as the field office phone then it shall be a local number. C. Sanitary Facilities: Toilet rooms in existing buildings may be used with written approval of the Owner. Coordinate with University Center Facility Manager for terms and conditions of use. D. Temporary Heat and Ventilation: Provide such OSHA approved heat and fuel, heating units, equipment as necessary to provide the required environmental conditions and to protect the work from damage due to cold. Maintain equipment in a clean, safe condition. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES 2.03 F. Fire Extinguisher: 1. Except as otherwise indicated or required, comply with the applicable recommendations of NFPA No. 10 "Portable Fire Extinguisher" for each area of each construction activity whenever combustible materials, flammable liquids, and similar exposures to possible fires are present. 2. Locate extinguisher where most convenient and effective for the intended purposes. Store combustible materials in recognized fire-safe locations and containers. G. Protection 1. Barricades, Walkways, Warning Signs, and lights: Comply with recognized standards and code requirements for the erection of substantial and structurally adequate barricades wherever needed to prevent accidents and losses. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel at the site and the general public where exposure exists of the hazard being protected. Provide lighting where appropriate and needed for the recognition of the facility, safe public passage and include flashing red lights where appropriate. H. Temporary Enclosure: Wherever required, provide temporary enclosure of materials, equipment, work in progress, and completed portions of work, so as to afford protection for both the work and employees. I. Miscellaneous Facilities: 1. Provide ladders, ramps, and temporary stairs for access to all levels of the construction for general access by all trades, Individual contractors and subcontractors shall furnish their own stepladders, scaffolds, staging, work platforms, and other facilities for use of their workmen and as necessary for safety of all personnel. J. Field Office: 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain a suitable temporary field office for his own use. Offices and all other temporary structures shall be removed from the site upon completion of the work. 2. Temporary structures or storage used for storage and offices for contractors shall be located on the site in an orderly manner as determined by the Owner. OPERATIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in the use of temporary facilities at the project site. Limit availability of facilities to essential and intended uses, so as to minimize waste and possibility of abuses and the resulting unsanitary and hazardous or dangerous conditions. B. Maintenance: Operate and maintain temporary facilities in good operating condition through the time of use and until removal is authorized. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements at the site. C. Termination and removal: At the time the need has ended for each temporary facility, or when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or at the time of Substantial completion, promptly remove the facility unless requested by the Consultant to be retained for a longer period of time. Complete or restore permanent work which may have been delayed or otherwise affected by the temporary facility. Replace work which cannot be satisfactorily restored. Except as otherwise indicated, the materials and equipment of temporary facilities remain the property of the contractors. END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 58 00 – PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN PART 1 - GENERAL A. Provide labor, equipment, and materials for fabrication of a project sign as specified by the Project Architect. B. Project sign(s) shall be required for all major renovation and new construction projects. The location(s) shall be at a point on or adjacent to the worksite where its visibility to the passing public is most apparent. C. The maximum size of project sign backgrounds shall be 40 sq. ft. In most cases, an 8' x 4' plywood panel is recommended. For smaller projects, sign backgrounds may be less, but in no case shall be smaller than 16 sq. ft. PART 2 -- PRODUCT A. Fabricate a portable, interior project sign of 2" x 4" wood studs for a 4'-0" x 4'-0" background mounted 6’-0” off the floor. Wood studs shall be attached to 2”x 4” wood stand and not be attached to any wall or floor surface. Paint plywood edges and entire support assembly. Backgrounds shall be at least 3/4" thick painted plywood. B. Design of the sign, including graphics, lettering, and colors, shall be furnished by the Project Architect and approved by the University. At a minimum, the sign shall include the following information: 1. An artist's conception of the completed building or other facility as envisioned by the Project Architect. 2. Project name in prominent sized lettering. 3. Name of principal occupant or use. 4. Owner's name: "University of Colorado at Colorado Springs." Use approved style lettering and "UCCS" logo. 5. Under owner's name add: "Project Manager: Department of Facilities Services." 6. Project Architect and Principal Consultants' names. Include city and state of each, and telephone number of Project Architect. 7. Include "Project Start [date]," and "Project Completion [date]." PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Project sign shall be in place prior to the start of construction, and shall not be removed until the point of substantial completion. B. Location(s), number(s), size, configuration, and other details of the installation, including height above grade, shall be furnished and approved by the Project Architect with the approval of the University. D. If, at the end of the project, the sign is re-usable, it shall be disposed of as directed by the University. END OF SECTION PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN 015800 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 60 00 – MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. B. 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 Section Includes: 1. Products. 2. Transportation and Handling. 3. Storage and Protection. 4. Manufacturer's Instructions. 5. Product Options. 6. Products List. 7. Substitutions. 8. Systems Demonstration. Related Sections: 1. Section 01400 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. B. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the Consultant. C. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 1. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. 2. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer' instruction, with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including one copy to the Consultant and one copy to the Contractor. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 016000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 60 00 – MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT B. 1.06 1.07 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named. C. Consultant will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and notify, by Addendum, of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution. PRODUCT LIST A. 1.08 Within 15 days after signing of agreement, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. SUBSTITUTIONS A. 1.09 Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. Will only be considered prior to bid or in the event that Equipment is not available. SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION A. Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to Consultant and Owner. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems, using the operation and maintenance data as the basis of instruction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 016000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 70 00 – CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall comply with procedures stated in the General Conditions of the Contract for Notice of Completion, Final Inspection, Notice of Substantial Completion and Notice of Acceptance. B. Should the Architect/Engineer or the Principle Representative determine that the work is not substantially complete, or the punch list items exceed 25, he will immediately notify the Contractor, in writing, stating reasons. After Contractor completes work, he shall resubmit certification and request for final inspection. The Contractor will be responsible for all costs beyond two Architect/Engineer walk-throughs. C. Owner may occupy designated portions of the Project under provisions stated in the General Conditions of the Contract. CLOSE-OUT FORMS The Architect/Engineer will complete the Notice of Approval of Beneficial Occupancy, Closing-out Checklist and Contract Close-out forms and forward them to the Contractor. Comply with procedures stated in General Conditions of the Contract. 1.03 1.04 FINAL SETTLEMENT AND PAYMENT A. Contractor shall comply with procedures stated in the General Conditions of the Contract before final settlement and payment are made. B. The Contractor shall also submit the following prior to the final application for payment: 1. Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debit and Claims: AIA G706. 2. Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens (claims): AIA G706A, with: a. Consent of Surety to final payment: AIA G707 b. Contractor’s release of waivers of claims. c. Separate release of waivers of claims for subcontractors, suppliers and others with claim rights, against property of owner, together with list of those parties. GUARANTEE INSPECTION A. 1.05 The Contractor shall comply with procedures stated in the General Conditions of the Contract for Guarantee Inspections after completion of the work. WARRANTIES AND SPECIAL GUARANTEES The Contractor shall comply with procedures and criteria outlined in the General Conditions of the Contract for all warranties and special guarantees of the work. 1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Refer to Section 017300 - Operating and Maintenance. B. Mechanical - By Mechanical Contractor: See Division 22 & 23. CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT 017000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 70 00 – CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT C. 1.07 1.08 Electrical - By Electrical Contractor: See Division 25 & 26. DEMONSTRATIONS A. Refer to Section 01730 - Operating and Maintenance B. Mechanical - By Mechanical Contractor: See Division 22 & 23. C. Electrical - By Electrical Contractor: See Division 25 & 26. SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each Section, in addition to that used for construction of work. Coordinate with Owner, deliver to Project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment. B. At the completion of the project, all loose keys for hose bibs; adjustment keys and wrenches for door closers and panic hardware; and keys for electric switches, electrical panels, etc., shall be accounted for by the Contractor and turned over to the Owner. END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT 017000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 71 00 – CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CLEANING A. Clean-up During Construction: Each contractor shall keep the building and premises free from all surplus material, waste material, dirt and rubbish caused by his employees or work, and at the completion of his work he shall remove all such surplus material, waste material, dirt and rubbish, as well as his tools, equipment and scaffolding, and shall leave his work clean and spotless, unless more exact requirements are specified. In case of dispute, the owner may remove all such items and charge the cost of such removal to the contractor. Each sub-contractor shall perform his clean-up daily and shall transport his rubbish to an on-site location designated by the Contractor who will arrange for its removal. B. Cleaners: With the exception of clean-up of the site and cleaning specifically assigned to Contractors under various sections of the specifications, all final clean-up of exterior and interior of the building shall be done by professional cleaners. C. Final Clean-up: 1. Exterior: In addition to items specified below, any new surfaces on exterior, concrete, metal, etc., shall be carefully and thoroughly cleaned. 2. Glass: Both sides of all glass in work areas shall be carefully and thoroughly cleaned by professional window cleaners and left absolutely clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. 3. Hardware: Clean and polish all hardware and leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. 4. Plumbing: Clean and polish all plumbing fixtures, fittings, and exposed plated piping. Leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. Remove all labels. 5. Electrical: Clean and polish all electric fixtures, including glassware, switch plates, etc. and leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. 6 Equipment: Carefully and thoroughly clean all items of equipment, mechanical, electrical, cabinets, ductwork, etc. 7. Floors: Thoroughly clean all floors. Vacuum and clean carpeting. Shampooing of preexisting carpet is required once project is complete. Contractor is responsible for this. a. Contractors are responsible for cleaning (stripping floors if necessary) then applying the required two coats of sealer and three coats of finish before releasing the building for occupancy. University Center personnel will provide a contact person for help concerning campus standards free of charge. Or Custodial floor care services may be sub-contracted out through a work order system. b. Approved Sealers and Finishes for Vinyl Tile Flooring: UCCS requires floor care products to be from the same product line. (Different brands may interact disastrously). CLEANING 017100 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 71 00 – CLEANING JohnsWax Freedom Butchers: Time Buster Full Impact Airkeim: Air Strip Sealers: Over & Under Technique Iron Stone Laser, Gemini Finishes: Show Place MainStay Above Laser, Gemini Strippers: Campus safety standards require at least TWO (2) coats of Sealer be applied to a cleaned floor, and at least THREE (3) coats of Finish must be applied on top of the sealer. c. d. e. CLEANING Floor Cleaning Procedures: 1. Sweep floor clean of debris 2. Cord off area if necessary 3. Put up Caution signs 4. Mix Stripper or Cleaning solution according to label 5. Apply solution to floor 6. Start setting up equipment 7. Place RED abrasive pad on buffer (buffer less than 300 rpms) 8. Begin stripping or cleaning floor working with buffer moving it side to side across the floor. 9. Use HEPA filtered water vacuum to begin to suck up slurry* *use of HEPA filtered water vacuum is required on existing floor tile which contains asbestos. 10. Apply additional coats of water and re-vacuum up floor 11. Mop floor with clean water, change rinse water often 12. Mop floor a second time 13. Mop floor to dry completely 14. Clean up equipment 15. Wash red pad with clean water. Sealing Procedures: 1. Using a new mop head or clean wax mop and clean bucket, apply first coat of approved sealer to floor 2. Allow floor to dry completely (at least 20 minutes) 3. Apply second coat of sealer 4. Allow floor to dry Finishing (Waxing) Procedures: 1. Using a clean wax mop and bucket apply first coat of approved finish (wax) 2. Allow floor to dry completely (at least 20 minutes) 3. Apply second coat of finish (wax) 4. Allow floor to dry completely (at least 20 minutes) 5. Apply third coat of finish (wax) 6. Allow floor to dry completely (at least 30 minutes) 7. Wash mop and bucket with clean water 8. If floor is dry - remove caution signs and open area up 017100 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 71 00 – CLEANING f. E. Burnishing Procedures: The next working day 1. Sweep floor clean of debris 2. Spot mop floor to remove spots and dirt 3. Set up High Speed Burnisher to make for a safe environment 4. Start Burnishing. Walk forward in a straight line 5. At end of row, turn around and start forward again 6. Repeat steps 5 & 6 until finished 7. Clean up equipment and pad. Completion: The entire work inside and out, and the entire premises shall be in first-class, clean condition upon completion before being accepted by the Owner. END OF SECTION CLEANING 017100 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 72 00 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. 1.03 The Project Record Documents are intended to indicate all changes and deviations from the original contract documents and permanently record the “as-built” condition of material, equipment and structure. The project record documents shall include the contract drawings, project manual, addenda, change orders, modifications and clarifications, field directives, approved shop drawings, approved product data, manufacturer’s certificates and project test results. SUBMITTALS A. 1.04 This section describes the definitions, recording and maintenance requirements and the submittal requirements for record documents. Submit the project record documents in conformance with Section 01700 and prior to the final applications for payment. The final application for payment will not be approved prior to the submittal of record documents. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The project record documents shall be updated at a minimum on a weekly basis and shall be readily available for inspection by the owner and consultants. Maintain a separate set of complete documents for exclusive use of record documents and protect the documents from damage in a clean, dry location. Note: Progress applications for payment will not be approved if record documents are not current. B. The record documents (submitted electronically in PDF format as one document) shall contain a clear, legible record of all detail and dimensional changes and locate all concealed work including, but not limited to: 1. Interior and Exterior Utilities 2. Valves 3. Dampers 4. Controls 5. Junction Boxes 6. Clean-outs 7. Access Doors C. The project manual (specifications) shall indicate all manufacturers’ products complete with catalogue number and trade name of products installed. All changes and corrections to the project manual shall be clearly indicated. END OF SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT 017200 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 73 00 – OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for the University of Colorado, Colorado Spring's maintenance and operation of products furnished. B. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of specifications. C. Instruct the UCCS, Facilities Services personnel in the maintenance of PRODUCTS and in the operation of equipment and systems. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.03 Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of the described products. 2. Completely familiar with requirements of this section. 3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings. SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by the University of Colorado, Colorado Springs, Facilities Services personnel. Quantities are listed in Part 1.07. B. Format: 1. Submit electronically in PDF format as one document, bookmarked according to CSI standards. 2. 1.04 Title shall be "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", and shall include:. a. Name of project and date of completion (month and year). b. Project number. c. Identify of general subject matter covered in the manual (e.g., Architectural, Mechanical, Electrical and/or Civil). CONTENT OF MANUAL A. An electronically-written table of contents shall be provided for each volume, arranged according to CSI standards. Include the following: 1. Name of responsible installing principal contractor, address, and telephone number. 2. A list of each product being included, indexed to the content of the volume. 3. List with each product, the name, address, and telephone number of: a. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. b. Identity of the area of responsibility of each. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE 017300 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 73 00 – OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE 1.05 B. Product Data: 1. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 2. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to the specific product, with the following information. a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. c. Delete references to inapplicable information. C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information in project record drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use project record drawings as maintenance drawings. D. Provide written text, as required, to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. E. Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued. Provide information sheets for the University of Colorado, Facilities Services personnel and give: 1. Proper procedures in the event of failure. 2. Instances that might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. MANUALS FOR ARCHITECTURAL MATERIAL AND FINISHES A. Submit copies (per schedule) of complete manual in final form. B. Content for architectural products including applied materials and finishes. 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special manufactured products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to the product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 3. Schedules and Samples a. Finish schedule for all materials b. Samples of all finish materials labeled and keyed to the finish schedule. Content for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: 1. Provide manufacturer's data, giving fully information on products. a. Applicable standards b. Chemical composition c. Details of installation 2. Provide instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. C. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE 017300 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 73 00 – OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE 1.06 MANUAL FOR NON-ARCHITECTURAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit copies (per schedule) of complete manual in final form. B. Content for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate shall contain: 1. Description of unit and component parts (Consultant-approved submittals). a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and Commercial number of all replaceable parts. 2. Operating Procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to troubleshooting. c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjustment, and checking. 4. Servicing and Lubrication Schedule, including a list of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance and replacement. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. C. Content for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate, shall contain: 1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and Commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Operating Procedures: a. Routing and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routing operations. b. Guide to troubleshooting. c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of the University of Colorado, Facilities Management's personnel. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE 017300 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 73 00 – OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE 1.07 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL QUANTITIES / SCHEDULE A. 1.08 1.09 If not compiled into two CD’s or DVD’s, provide two each per discipline: Architectural Electrical (Including as-built drawings) Mechanical & Controls (Including shop drawings) Elevators (Including shop drawings) Fire Alarms (Including shop drawings) Fire Protection (Including shop drawings) SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit one electronic copy to the Consultants and one to the University of draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents upon completion of the submittal process. The Consultants and the University staff will review the draft and will submit comments through the consultants. B. Submit electronic copies of complete manual(s) in final form 15 days prior to final inspection or acceptance. Comments will be submitted after final inspection. C. Submit specified number of CDs or DVDs of approved data in final form prior to acceptance. INSTRUCTION OF UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO, FACILITIES SERVICES PERSONNEL A. Fully instruct the University of Colorado, Facilities Management personnel's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of all products, equipment, and systems as required elsewhere in the specification. B. Operating and Maintenance manual may be required as the basis of instruction. PART 2 - MATERIAL Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE 017300 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 01 81 15 - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Review ELECTRICAL documents to assure coordination between MECHANICAL and ELECTRICAL diciplines. Notify Architect of any discrepancies prior to ordering equipment. B. Notify General Contractor of changes in electrical characteristics of mechanical equipment substituted for that specified. Bear all costs associated with any electrical changes or additions required for substituted equipment not conforming to original specifications. C. Provide equipment and labor in accordance with the following schedule as applicable unless indicated otherwise. For any items not scheduled below, provide and wire complete under Mechanical and Plumbing disciplines. D. Refer to ELECTRICAL specifications for type of wiring required for all applications. ITEM . 1. Packaged Equipment 2. Equipment Motors 3. Motor Control Centers 4. Magnetic Motor Starters 5. Remote Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, HOA's 6. Disconnect Safety Switches, Thermal Overload Switches, Motor Snap Switches 7. Single Speed Line Voltage Operating Switch Legs 8. Multi- or Variable-Speed Line Voltage Operating Switch Legs 9. Line Voltage Thermostats 10. Fire Sprinkler Controls, Switches, Alarms 11. Duct-mounted Fire and Smoke Detectors 12. 120V to Control Panels 13. Remote Time Clocks 14. Controls 15. Device Labels SET IN PLACE OR MOUNTED UNDER . MD MD ED ED MD POWER WIRING & CONNECT UNDER . ED(1) ED ED ED -- CONTROL WIRING & CONNECT UNDER . MD MD MD MD MD ED ED ED -- MD/ED(2) ED/MD(2) -- ED/MD(2) MD ED/MD(2) -- ED/MD(2) MD MD ED MD ED ED -ED ED/MD(3) MD ED ED/MD(4) ED MD MD(6) (7) -MD MD(6) (7) ED(5) ED MD(6 -- -MD MD(6) -- FURNISH UNDER MD MD ED MD MD . MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 018115 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado FOOTNOTES: MD = Mechanical Division ED = Electrical Division (1) = ED will wire to terminal lugs on equipment. Any internal wiring required is the responsibility of the MD. (2) = By ED when shown on electrical drawings, otherwise by MD. (3) = By ED when project incorporates a central fire alarm system, otherwise by MD. (4) = ED wires to fire alarm system. MD wires to fan controls. (5) = ED will terminate wiring in a J-box near the panel; MD extend from box to panel. (6) = All control work by MD unless specifically assigned to ED, regardless of voltage. (7) = Furnished by the Division furnishing the device, installed by the Division installing the device. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 018115 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 020700 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. 1.2 Demolition, removal, and recycling of selected portions of building or structure. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. “Summary of Work” for use of premises and Owner-occupancy requirements. “Temporary Facilities” for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. “Cutting and Patching” for cutting and patching procedures. Division 1 Section “Construction Waste Management and Recycling” for nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. Related Document: Environmental Consultation/Comprehensive Asbestos Building Inspection attached End of this Section. DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. C. Waste Management Log: Indicate amount of material by weight and it’s recycling/disposal method. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 020700 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. 1.5 Certified by an EPA-approved certification PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. 1.6 Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 020700 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, preconstruction photographs, preconstruction videotapes and templates. G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. 2. 3. 3.3 Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in "Temporary Facilities." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 020700 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. 2. 3. 4. 3.5 Clean salvaged items. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. D. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 020700 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado D. 3.6 Resilient Floor coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site, recycle all metals, wood, plastics, and paper products, and legally dispose of all unrecyclable materials in an EPA-approved landfill. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 020700 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 020700 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 042113 - BRICK MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes thin brick. B. Related Section 09 “Tiling” for thin-set mortar. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. 2. D. 1.3 Thin brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. Accessories embedded in masonry. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. F. Thin brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. Colored mortar. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. 2. E. Thin Brick Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. Material Certificates: For each product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Thin Brick Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.4 Build mockup of typical wall area as directed by Architect. Where masonry is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing surface. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. Dimensional tolerances of the finished mockup shall conform to Industry Standards, ACI Standards and ASTM Standards, unless otherwise indicated by the Architect. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. E. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. 2.2 Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. THIN BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units. 1. 2. 3. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 4. B. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. Thin Brick: Thin brick complying with ASTM C 1088 “Standard Specification for Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale.” 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.3 MetroBrick, A Product of Ironrock Capital, Inc.; MetroBrick Architectural Thin Brick (Basis-of-Design). Endicott Clay Products Company. Summitville Tile Company. Universal Brick Systems, Inc. Nominal Size: To match existing as approved by Architect. Texture: To match existing as approved by Architect. Color: To match existing as approved by Architect. Location: As indicated on Drawings. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67 “Standard Specification for Absorption Rates of Thin Veneer Brick Units Made from Clay or Shale.” MORTAR MATERIALS A. 2.4 Refer to Section 09 “Tiling” for thin-set mortar. REINFORCEMENT A. 2.5 Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. 2.6 Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC. MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Recommended Interior Installation Methods per Tile Council of America (TCA) “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation:” 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. TCA W211. TCA W221. TCA W222. TCA W231. TCA W241. TCA W244. B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. E. Install thin brick in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. C. 3.4 Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared mortar. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. E. 3.5 Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook." Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042113 BRICK MASONRY 042113 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 057400 - METAL FOOT RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes steel curved bar foot rails. B. Related Section: Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. 1.3 Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design, including mechanical finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. E. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including structural analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. D. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. METAL FOOT RAILINGS 057400 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Size: 1-1/2 inches, square steel tubing. C. Location: As indicated on the Drawings. D. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.2 Provide cast-metal brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. Provide either formed- or cast-metal brackets with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. Provide formed-steel brackets with predrilled hole for bolted anchorage and with snap-on cover that matches rail finish and conceals bracket base and bolt head. Provide extruded-aluminum brackets with interlocking pieces that conceal anchorage. Locate set screws on bottom of bracket. STEEL A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513. B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. 2. 2.4 Uncoated Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed; Type 304 stainlesssteel fasteners where exposed. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. METAL FOOT RAILINGS 057400 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. 2.5 Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. STEEL A. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat nongalvanized ferrous metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. 2. 3. B. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Color: Black. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat galvanized metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Prepare galvanized metal by thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter. Treat prepared metal with zinc-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Color: Black. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Examine concrete substrates where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. METAL FOOT RAILINGS 057400 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.4 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. 3.5 For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 057400 METAL FOOT RAILINGS 057400 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. 1.2 Cabinet hardware and accessories. Interior standing and running trim. Interior frames and jambs. Interior board paneling. Plastic-laminate cabinets. Plastic-laminate countertops. Custom millwork and casework. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Show details full size. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers and other items installed in architectural woodwork. Show attachment details and dimensional relationships to adjacent work. Samples for Verification: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge. Thermoset decorative-panels, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on 1 edge. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches (150 mm) square. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. Finish samples of all exposed finishes. Corner pieces as follows: a. b. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) deep. Miter joints for standing trim. D. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. E. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: certificates. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK AWI Quality Certification Program 064023 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado F. 1.3 Qualification Data: For Installer. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. 1.4 Provide AWI Quality Certification Program indicating installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. that woodwork, including DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. 1.5 Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. 1.6 Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Wood Species and Cut for Finish: Alder, plain sawn or sliced. C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering thermoset decorative panels that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. E. Provide matching colored Doellken-Woodtape edge banding on components with exposed or semiexposed edges. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3-2000, for compact laminate grade CGS, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2.2 Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.; Wilsonart Standard Decorative Laminate (Basis-of-Design). Panolam Industries International Incorporated. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc.; Arborite Solid Phenolic Core Panels (Basisof-Design). Formica Corporation. Panolam Industries International Incorporated. CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)." B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal, and as follows: 1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors with 135 degree opening: B01521. BHMA A156.9, C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): opening, self-closing. D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. E. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal 5 inches (127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) deep, and 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. F. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131. G. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of 064023 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado H. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip. I. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. 2. 3. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 24 inches (600 mm) wide. J. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. K. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. L. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. M. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. N. 2.3 Satin Black Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.4 FABRICATION GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. indicated for the following: 1. 2. Ease edges to radius Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm). INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Alder, plain sawn. C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. 2.6 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 INTERIOR BOARD PANELING A. Board Paneling: Interior wood-board paneling complying with WMMPA WM 9. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.8 Species: Alder. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12 percent or less. Pattern: V-joint, tongue and groove, PT 82. Net Coverage Width: Not less than 5-1/16 inches (128 mm). PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS PL-1 A. Grade: Premium. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. C. Reveal Dimension: As indicated. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. Edges: Melamine edge banding 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. a. b. 2. 3. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: Melamine edge banding 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. F. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Color: Shaker Cherry – 7935-07. 1) b. 2.9 Location: AV cabinet base and upper cabinet. Pattern: Directional pattern. PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINET PNL-1 A. Grade: Premium. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: CGS. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. D. Reveal Dimension: As indicated. E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. G. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. Edges: PVC edge banding 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. a. b. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 6 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2. 3. H. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Color: Black. 1) 2.10 Location: Back bar cabinet. PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS PL-2 A. Grade: Premium. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS or HGP. C. Edge Treatment: Melamine edge banding 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Color: Black – 1595-60. 1) b. Location: Back bar work surface. Pattern: Non-directional pattern. E. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. F. No joints are permitted within 2 feet of sink cut-outs. 2.11 SHOP FINISHING A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. B. General: Drawings indicate items that are required to be shop finished. Finish such items at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for finishing architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. D. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panels. Transparent Finish: INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 7 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Grade: Premium. AWI Finish System: Conversion varnish. Staining: Match Architect's sample. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closedgrain wood before staining and finishing. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. Sheen: Match Architect’s sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches (900 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. 1. 2. G. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Board Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Arrange in randomwidth pattern suggested by manufacturer unless boards or planks are of uniform width. 1. 2. Install in full lengths without end joints. Install with uniform end joints with only end-matched (tongue-and-groove) joints within each field of paneling. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 8 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3. 4. H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. 2. I. Select and arrange boards on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and color between adjacent boards. Install with uniform tight joints between boards. Fasten paneling as indicated in Drawings. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. 2. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. J. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. K. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 9 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic paneling and trim accessories. C. Samples for Verification: For plastic paneling and trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2. 3. 1.4 Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING FRP-1 A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. PLASTIC PANELING Kemlite Company Inc. Marlite. Nudo Products, Inc. 066400 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.2 Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch (2.3 mm). Surface Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Color: Beige. Location: Kitchen 102; floor to ceiling. ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard two-piece, snap-on vinyl extrusions designed to cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: Match panels. B. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate. D. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. E. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide. 1. 2. 3.3 Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory locations for accurate installation. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that fasteners are accurately aligned. 1. 2. Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes. Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners. D. Install trim accessories with adhesive. Do not fasten through panels. E. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. F. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. G. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 066400 PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 1.2 Floor-to-floor joints. Floor-to-wall joints. Head-of-wall joints. Wall-to-wall joints. Perimeter fire-resistive joint systems consisting of floor-to-wall joints between perimeter edge of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for systems installed in openings in walls and floors with and without penetrating items. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive joint sealants. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join, indicated as determined by UL 2079. 1. C. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For joints between edges of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls, provide systems of type and with ratings indicated below and those indicated in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3, as determined by UBC Standard 26-9 and UL 2079. 1. D. 1.3 Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time of test. UL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: Integrity ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fireresistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1. C. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items. Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule: Indicate locations of each fire-resistive joint system, along with the following information: 1. Types of fire-resistive joint system ratings. D. Product Certificates: manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Evaluation Reports: Evidence of fire-resistive joint systems' compliance with ICBO ES AC30, from the ICBO Evaluation Service. 1.4 For each type of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fireresistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. 2. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following: a. b. 1.5 Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems. C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. D. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector of authorities having jurisdiction have examined each installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 2.2 Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fire-resistive joint systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. 2. 3. 3.4 Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect fire-resistive joint systems and prepare inspection reports. B. Testing Services: Inspecting of completed installations of fire-resistive joint systems shall take place in successive stages as installation of fire-resistive joint systems proceeds. Do not proceed with installation of joint systems for the next area until inspecting agency determines completed work shows compliance with requirements. 1. Inspecting agency shall state in each report whether inspected fire-resistive joint systems comply with or deviate from requirements. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. Remove and replace fire-resistive joint systems where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and fire-resistive joint systems comply with requirements. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fireresistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fireresistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. 3.6 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Designation System for Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Alphanumeric systems listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product Category XHBN. B. Designation System for Joints at the Intersection of Fire-Resistance-Rated Floor or Floor/Ceiling Assembly and an Exterior Curtain-Wall Assembly: Alphanumeric systems listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product Category XHDG: C. Floor-to-Floor Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1. 2. 3. D. Floor-to-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1. 2. 3. E. Available UL-Classified Systems: FW-D-0000-0999 and 1000-1999. Assembly Rating: As indicated on Drawings. Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. Head-of-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1. 2. 3. F. Available UL-Classified Systems: FF-S-1000-19999. Assembly Rating: As indicated on Drawings. Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. Available UL-Classified Systems: HW-D-0000-0999 and 1000-1999. Assembly Rating: As indicated on Drawings. Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. Wall-to-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1. 2. 3. Available UL-Classified Systems: WW-S-0000-0999 and 1000-1999. Assembly Rating: As indicated on Drawings. Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado G. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: 1. Available UL-Classified Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: 1000-1999. a. b. c. CW-D-0000-0999 and Integrity Rating: As indicated on Drawings. Insulation Rating: As indicated on Drawings. Linear Opening Width: As indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION 078446 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 6 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes sealants specified by reference to this Section: PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide exterior elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and waterresistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the standard range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Application shall be done by a Joint Sealant Subcontractor with five years experience. Submit documentation to the Architect and Owner B. Source Limitations: manufacturer. C. Manufacturer Technical Assistance: Materials shall be supplied by manufacturer who will provide qualified technical assistance at the Project site. D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. 2. 3. Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado E. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution: 1. F. 1.5 Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. 1.6 Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. C. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.2 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Tremco Manufacturing. Dow Corning. General Electric. Pecora Corporation. Maneco International. Sika Corporation. Sonneborn Building Products. MATERIALS, GENERAL A. 2.3 Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant. B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is required provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920. C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Interior Silicone Rubber Sealant: 1. 2. 3. 4. E. Silicone rubber-base, one-part elastomeric sealant, complying ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. Use acid-type for non-porous joint surfaces, and non-acid type where one or both joint surfaces are porous. For wet areas use type compounded specifically for mildew resistance. Use for interior joints between equipment or countertops and walls. Exterior Sealant: 1. 2. Two-Component Polyurethane: Polyurethane-based, 2-part elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM C920 Type M, Class 25, Grade NS (non-sag), Tremco “Dymeric”, Pecora “Dynatrol II.” One-Component Silicone: a. b. JOINT SEALANTS Precast Concrete Surfaces: #790 by Dow-Corning Stone and Glass Surfaces: #795 by Dow-Corning 079200 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3. 2.4 For exterior and interior sidewalk and floor joints, polyurethane as above except Grade P (self-leveling), Tremco “Dymeric”, Pecora “Urexpan NR-200.” LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product. B. One-component Acrylic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion sealant, one-part, mildew resistant and paintable, complying with ASTM C834, recommended by manufacturer for general use as an exposed building construction sealant, Pecora AC-20. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a b c 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a b 2.6 PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co. BA-98; Pecora Corp. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc. PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A. Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Provide manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral-curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. B. Preformed Foam Sealants: Provide manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent; factory produced in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated and to develop a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and complying with the following: 1. 2. 3. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants. Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard. Density: Manufacturer's standard. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 4. 2.7 Backing: Pressure-sensitive adhesive, factory applied to one side with protective wrapping. JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. 2. 3. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. Type: Any material indicated above. C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide selfadhesive tape where applicable. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. 2. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oilfree compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. b. c. 3. 4. Concrete. Masonry. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. b. c. d. Metal. Glass. Porcelain enamel. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3. E. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. H. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. 2. Apply a bead of silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's printed schedule and covering a bonded area of not less than a 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead inside of masking tape by 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 4. Complete installation of horizontal joints before installing vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At end of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. I. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, to produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant to comply with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. 3.5 Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 7 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes standard hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 1.2 Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. Division 09 painting sections for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls and operators. DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. C. Other Action Submittals: 1. D. 1.4 Elevations of each door design. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. Details of each different wall opening condition. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. Details of accessories. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 1. C. 1.5 Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. 1.6 Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. 1.7 Field Measurements: fabrication. Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. Windsor Republic Doors. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m) density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. 2. Design: Flush panel. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. b. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 12.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (2.166 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 1) 3. Locations: Exterior doors and interior doors where indicated. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge. a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm). HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 4. 5. 6. B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. C. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) radius. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. 2. 3. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. 2. 3. 4. D. 2.5 Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. 2. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows: 1. 2. 2.6 Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Solid blocking is required in wall where wall mounted stops are indicated. B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. D. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. E. Terminated Stops: Where indicated on interior door frames, terminate stops 6 inches (152 mm) above finish floor with a 45-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame. 1. 2.7 Provide terminated stops where indicated. LOUVERS A. 2.8 Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- ((0.5-mm-)) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- (0.8mm-) thick steel frame. ACCESSORIES A. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. 2. 3. D. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors; the lower edge of the glazing must be a maximum of 43 inches above the finished floor. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) c. 6. Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. b. E. Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. 2. 3. 4. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.10 A. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. STEEL FINISHES Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. 3.3 Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. 3. 4. 5. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 8 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 6. 7. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. b. c. d. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. D. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm). Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 3.4 Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each corner. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 9 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 1.2 Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. Division 09 Sections "Painting" for field finishing doors. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. 2. Submit schedules and elevations indicating: door sizes, construction, swing, undercuts, cutouts, requirements for veneer matching, and applicable hardware locations (including locations of mortises and holes). Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. B. Samples: If doors are to be factory finished, manufacturer shall submit veneer samples of specified veneer with their standard finish colors at the architect’s request, or a color sample from the architect will be sent to the manufacturer for duplication. Samples are to be submitted representing the color selected on veneer typical of grain patterns and coloration for the specified species and cut. C. Product Information: Submit manufacturer’s product description showing compliance with specifications, along with finishing instructions, installation instructions, and any general recommendations the manufacturer may have for the care and maintenance of each door type. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body B. Source Limitations: All doors shall be the product of the same manufacturer to insure uniformity of quality ans appearance throughout the project. C. Quality Standards: Provide doors meeting or exceeding the minimum standards as set forth by the following organizations unless standards are modified or exceeded by this specification: 1. 2. D. American Woodwork Institute (AWI), Section 1300 and 1500 (for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements). WDMA I.S. 1A – Window and Door Manufacturers Association (face veneer requirements). The top of each door shall bear a label from the manufacturer indicating the door construction, face veneer species, cut and grade. If the doors are factory finished the label shall also have the finishing information. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado E. 1.4 The Door Manufacturer shall provide a letter, signed by an authorized company representative, to the Architect stating that the doors have been manufactured in compliance with the specifications. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. No doors shall be delivered to the building until weatherproof storage space is available. Store doors in a space having controlled temperature and humidity range between 30 to 60 percent. Stack doors flat and off the floor, supported to prevent warpage. Protect doors from damage and direct exposure to sunlight. B. Factory finished doors shall be individually wrapped in polybags to protect the finish from damage by contact with other doors. C. Do not walk or place other material on top of stacked doors. Do not drag doors across one another. D. Contractor shall use all means necessary to protect doors from damage to, during, and after installation. All damaged doors shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at no cost to the owner. E. Doors shall be palletized at factory and in stacks of no more than 30 doors per pallet. Door edges shall be protected with heavy corner guards. 1.5 COORDINATION A. 1.6 If requested by responsible trades and suppliers, contractor shall be responsible for coordination and acquiring all necessary information from hardware and metal frame manufacturers. Door manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating all necessary information received by Contractor from hardware and metal frame manufacturers, in order that doors shall be properly prepared to receive hinges and hardware. If requested by the door supplier, contractor shall provide the door supplier with two copies of approved frame schedule, two copies of hardware schedule, and all necessary hardware templates. All the above information shall be in the possession of the door supplier, if requested, 120 days prior to desired delivery date of doors. WARRANTY A. All work in this section shall be warranted by a FULL DOOR WARRANTY, from the date of installation, against defects in material and workmanship, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Periods of warranty after date of installation: 1. 2. C. Delamination in any degree. Warp or twist of ¼” or more in any 3’-6” x 7’-0” section of a door. Telegraphing of any part of core assembly through face to cause surface variation of 1/100” or morein a 3” span. Any defect which may, in any way, impair or affect performance of the door for the purpose which it is intended. Interior solid core and mineral core doors: Life of original installation. Exterior solid core doors: One (1) year from the date of installation. Doors must be stored, finished, hung and maintained per manufacturers recommendations set forth in their full door warranty. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 2.2 Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. Algoma. Eggers Industries. DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate flush wood doors in sizes indicated for Project site fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. 1. 2. 2.4 Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile as indicated within the Construction Documents. Vision Light Openings: If doors a re provided with vision lights, the lower edge of the glazing must be a maximum of 43 inches above the finished floor. FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. indicated to receive opaque finish. C. Transparent Finish: 1. 2. 3. Field finish doors Grade: Premium. Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane system. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 4. 5. Effect: Open-grain finish. Sheen: Semigloss. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. 2. B. 3.2 Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. Reject doors with defects. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4 SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. B. Hardware specified herein is to cover all necessary material required to fully complete the hardware requirements of specified openings. It is the intention that the hardware specified shall be of sufficient quantities necessary to complete the Work. Notify the Architect of omissions or discrepancies prior to bid date for clarifications or instructions. Adjustments to the Contract Sum will not be allowed for omissions not clarified prior to bid opening. C. This Section includes the following: 1.2 1. Hinges. 2. Key control system. 3. Lock cylinders and keys. 4. Lock and latch sets. 5. Exit devices. 6. Push/pull units. 7. Closers. 8. Miscellaneous door control devices. 9. Door trim units. 10. Protection plates. SUBMITTALS A. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. B. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a) DOOR HARDWARE Vertical format, horizontal format will not be reviewed and will be returned marked “not approved”. 08 71 00 1 2. b) Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. c) Maximum allowable degree of swing and door handing. d) Fire rating. e) Name and manufacturer of each item with catalog data sheets. f) Fastenings and other pertinent information. g) Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. h) Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. i) Mounting locations for hardware. j) Door and frame sizes and materials. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. C. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. D. Furnish three, (3), copies of maintenance manuals for each different hardware item, including operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated; recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to manufactures and installers maintenance personnel. Submit for Owners information at Project closeout as specified in Division 1. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. C. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 2 B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As hardware supplier from various manufacturers receives material, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site). E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. Present special tools and maintenance instructions to Owner at time of testing and demonstration interval. B. Manufacturers’ representatives of lock, cylinders, exit devices and door closers shall conduct two 8 hour training sessions for Owner personnel in the servicing and maintenance of hardware items. C. General Warranty: Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. D. Provide the following special hardware warranty for the following items: 1. Locksets 7 years. 2. Door Closers 10 years. 3. Exit devices 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: a) Ives Hinge: 3CB1 3CB1HW. b) Stanley Hinge: CB1900 CB1901. c) McKinney Hinge: TA714 TA786. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 3 2. Key Control System: a) 3. Locksets, Latchsets and Deadbolts: a) 4. Von Duprin: 98 Series. LCN: 4111 EDA Series. Door Trim Units: a) 2.2 93K 15D MX8. Door Closers and Magnetic Holders: a) 6. Best Lock: Exit/Panic Devices: a) 5. Incorporate with existing Schlage Lock keying system. Ives: WS407CVX FS436/FS438 FS441/442. SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. 2.3 Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. C. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 4 D. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. E. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. F. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS A. Hinges shall be certified to exceed two million, five hundred thousand, 2,500,000, full loadoperating cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames provide only template-produced units. B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements: C. D. 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3. For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws. 4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out-Swing Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins. 2. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins. 3. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves. 4. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges for door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. Unless otherwise specified, hinge size for doors through 3’-0” shall be 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches. 5. Hinges for doors over 3’-0” wide shall be four ball bearing, heavy weight, 0.190 gage. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include: 1. Ives Hinge: 3CB1 3CB1HW. 2. McKinney Hinge: TA714 TA786. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 5 3. 2.5 Stanley Hinge: CB1900 CB1901. KEYING SYSTEMS A. Meet with the Architect and Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain keying instructions in writing. Incorporate new keying system with Best Lock keying system. B. Furnish temporary interchangeable core construction keying system during construction period. 1. Owner shall install permanent keyed cores and return temporary interchangeable construction cores to hardware supplier. 2. Owner shall provide master keying pin combinations. 3. Permanent Cores: Keying shall be performed by Lock manufacturer. Furnish blank cylinder face, no logo; finish face to match lockset; interchangeable cores C. Cylinders shall be factory keyed and combinated. Combinate in sets or subsets, masterkeyed or great grandmaster keyed as directed by Owner. Keys and cylinders shall be stamped with the applicable key mark for identification. Permanent keys will also be embossed “Do Not Duplicate”. Stamp permanent keys in sequence. Key identification stamping to be approved by Architect and Owner. Stamp keys with serialized numbering; numbering to be approved by Architect and Owner. Failure to comply with these requirements may be cause to require replacement of all or any part of the cylinders and keys involved as deemed necessary at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Key Material: Furnish keys of nickel silver, to maintain security and safety of keying system and accuracy in keys and extended cylinder wear. E. Do not package permanent keys with locks. Package keys separately from locksets and cores. Deliver all permanent keys, key blanks and other security items direct to Owner from lock manufacturer by secure courier, return receipt requested. Failure to properly comply with these requirements may be cause to require replacement of all or any part of the cylinders and keys involved as deemed necessary at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Key Quantity: Furnish keys in the following quantities: G. 1. 12 each Temporary construction keys to General Contractor. 2. 2 each Construction control keys to General Contractor. 3. 2 each Grand Master keys for each grand master used, to Owner. 4. 2 each Master Keys for each master used, to Owner. 5. 2 each Permanent Control keys, to Owner. 6. 3 each Change keys per cylinder to Owner. 7. 50 Key blanks to Owner. 8. 1 each Bitting list to Owner. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include: DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 6 1. 2.6 Incorporate with Best Lock MX8 keying system. LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS A. Locksets and latchsets shall be non-handed, standard-duty commercial cylindrical type, with 23/4 inch backset or greater, as specified, with ½ inch throw latchbolt. B. Lever trim shall be designed to increase resistance against vandalism and forced entry by over torquing of lock chassis. Disablement of secured levers shall not permit latchbolt retraction from secure side while allowing emergency egress. C. Furnish units with concealed through-bolts and threaded chassis hubs to prevent lever torque from rotating lock chassis and maintain correct alignment. Equip units with cast auxiliary spring cages with studs to prevent rotation attached directly to the lock chassis to assist in support of levers. Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include: 1. 2.7 Best Lock 93K 15D series. EXIT DEVICES AND MULLIONS A. Provide exit devices of single manufacturer with specified functions, which can accept exterior and interior cylinders of specified cylinders. Were specified, furnish devices with cylinder dogging feature to maintain security and safety. B. Exit devices shall have smooth interior body to discourage vandalism and graffiti. Latch bolts shall deadlocking have a minimum projection of ¾ inches. Furnish through bolted fasteners for all devices. Where required, provide projecting glass stop kits to provide clearance when used with projecting glass stops. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include: 1. 2.8 Von Duprin: 98 Series. CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically challenged, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. Except as specifically indicated, comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for size of door control units, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. B. Closers shall be cast iron or aluminum construction with forged lever arms, independent adjusting valves for closing, latching and back check. Hydraulic regulation controlled by tamper-proof, non-critical screw valves. All closer adjustments shall be shielded by high impact plastic, cover plate after installation. C. Furnish extra duty arms, EDA, to protect against excessive force. Provide special templated arms to allow clearance and applications of overhead stops and holders. DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 7 1. Install closers to allow maximum degree of opening, position back check to activate well in advance of the stop position to cushion the opening swing and prevent door and frame damage. D. Furnish TBWMS fasteners; drill and tap for machine screw/through bolt applications. E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include: 1. 2.9 LCN: 4111 EDA Series. PROTECTIVE PLATES A. Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners for door trim units, Kick plates, edge trim, push/pull plates and similar units; either machine screws of self-tapping screws. B. Fabricate protection plates, armor, kick or mop, not more than 2 inches less than door width on stop side and not more than 1 inch less than door width on pull side, and 1 inch less than the door width on double doors, by the height indicated. C. 2.10 A. 1. Size plates to provide clearance for grills, louvers and door lites. 2. Metal Plates: 3. Mount ½-inches from bottom of door. Stainless steel plates (0.050). Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include: 1. Ives 8400, (0.050) B3E. 2. Rockwood K1062, (0.050) B3E. 3. Triangle Brass KO064, (0.050) B3E. DOOR STOPS Furnish heavy duty brass, bronze or stainless steel base material, concave or convex wall stops, coincide with lock function, wherever door strikes wall; fasteners to be with machine screws and lead anchors. 1. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic or present tripping hazard. Install at maximum door swing and out of traffic flow. B. Provide gray resilient rubber bumpers. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include: 1. 2.11 A. Ives: WS406 FS436/FS438 FS9. THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS Provide continuous seal at jambs and heads and at door bottom. Where specified, provide threshold type with silicone gasket. Smoke, or sound seals shall be rated in accordance with DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 8 surrounding wall rating respective to sound or fire rating or as required by code. Unless otherwise indicated, provide metal threshold units of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior and interior applications. B. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected by Architect from manufacturers standard color range; 0.062 inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include: 2.12 1. Pemko: 45061CN 345CN 272 S88D. 2. National Guard: A626A C627 613 2525B. HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and locksets (or push-pull units if no latch or locksets). B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. C. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry-recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. 1. Satin Chrome, Clear Coated: US26D/ANSI 626, ANSI 652. 2. Brushed Stainless Steel, No Coating: US32D/ANSI630. 3. Powder Coated Aluminum finish: ANSI 689. 4. Thresholds and Weatherseal: Thresholds, mill aluminum finish. anodized aluminum finish. Weatherseal, clear PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Examine substrates to which hardware assemblies attach to hollow metal frames, doors and walls, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, blocking and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION A. Preinstallation conference shall be conducted prior to installation of hardware at Project site. Meet with the, Owner, Contractor, installer, and hardware supplier and manufacturers representatives. Review catalogs, brochures, templates, installation instructions, and the DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 9 approved hardware schedule. Survey installation procedures and workmanship, with special emphasis on unusual conditions, as to ensure correct technique of installation, and coordination with other work. Notify participants at least 10 working days before conference. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, except as otherwise directed by Architect. 1. Exit device touch bar height, center line to finished floor 39-13/16-inches at center. a) Center exit devices on mid-rail of doors. 2. Lever locksets height to, centerline to finished floor: 38-inches at center. 3. Americans with Disabilities Act, (ADA), of 2003 Guidelines. C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturers written instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. D. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." G. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. 3.3 Space ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Manufacturer’s representatives for, locksets, cylinders, exit devices and door closers shall instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. B. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable. Notify the Architect of omissions or discrepancies prior to bid date for DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 10 clarifications or instructions. Adjustments to the Contract Sum will not be allowed for omissions not clarified prior to bid opening. SPECWORKS # 98360 HW SET: 01 (100A) EACH TO HAVE: 6 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA SET EA HINGE PANIC HARDWARE PANIC HARDWARE MORTISE CYLINDER OFFSET DOOR PULL SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE KICK PLATE WALL STOP SEALS MULLION GASKET Act InAct 3CB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 9827EO SNB 9827NL-OP SNB 1E74 MX-8 (EXIT DEVICE) 8190-0-O 4111 EDA ST3596 TBWMS 8400 10" X 1" LDW 8400 10" X 2" LDW 1270CVSC 2525B 5100S 630 626 626 626 630 689 630 630 626 BRN BLK IVE VON VON BES IVE LCN IVE IVE TRI NGP NGP 652 626 689 630 626 BRN 630 IVE BES LCN IVE TRI NGP IVE 652 626 630 630 GRY IVE BES GLY IVE IVE 372 630 630 BOM IVE IVE 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 HW SET: 02 (102A) EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 1 EA WALL STOP 1 SET SEALS 1 EA LOCK GUARD 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 93K7D 16D MX8 4111 EDA ST3596 TBWMS 8400 36" X 2" LDW 1270CVSC 2525B LG12 HW SET: 03 (103A) EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 1 EA KICK PLATE 3 EA SILENCER 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 93K7D 16D MX8 450S 8400 10" X 2" LDW SR64 HW SET: 04 (101A) EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA SPRING HINGE 2 EA PUSH PLATE 2 EA ARMOR PLATE 3029-8 8200 6" X 16" 8400 36" X 1" LDW END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 11 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections. SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples. B. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. D. 1.3 GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual." GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. B. Strength: Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. 2.2 Provide glass lites in GLASS PRODUCTS A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. B. Tempered Safety Glazing shall be 1/4 inch horizontal tempered clear glass with manufacturer’s etched identification marking. GLAZING 088000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2.3 TEMPERED SAFETY GLAZING A. Approved Manufacturer’s: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. 2.4 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the General Glass Company. LOF. PPG Industries, Inc. Other generally recognized manufacturers of glass and glazing products. Decorative Application: Frosted vinyl, as indicated on Drawings. MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES A. Interior glazing: All interior glazing shall be tempered safety glass. 1. 2. 3. 2.5 Thickness of Glass Lite: ¼ inch. Glass Lite: Fully tempered float glass. Provide tempered safety glazing labeling. GLAZING SEALANTS A. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Safety Glazing: 1. Safety glazing shall be installed in all openings within doors, at all glazed openings within 12 inches of door openings where the bottom edge is less than 5 feet from the floor, and at all fixed glazed openings of more than 9 square feet where the lower edge of the glazed panel is less than 18 inches above the adjacent floor level (except where the panel is protected by a horizontal member located between 24 inches and 36 inches above the adjacent floor). B. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are contained in GANA's "Glazing Manual." C. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. D. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. 2. 1.2 Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.). SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspection agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. 2. 2.2 Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosionresistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25.4 by 4.76 mm) by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. F. Depth: 1-1/2-inch. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. b. 2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep. a. 3. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2.3 Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. G. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring System. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. 2. B. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2. 3. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. D. Depth: 1-1/2-inch. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73mm-) thick, galvanized steel. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). Depth: 7/8-inch. Resilient Furring Channels: reduce sound transmission. 1. H. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. 2. G. Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. 2. F. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: indicated. 1. E. Steel Network Inc. (The); Verti Series. Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. 2. 3. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum baresteel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado I. Curved Wall Channel Track: otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 2.4 Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. Location: As indicated on Drawings. AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. 3.2 Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. 3. 4. 5. 6. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado E. 3.3 Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. 2. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. b. 3. 4. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. 5. D. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. Direct Furring: 1. 2. E. Install two 20-gauge studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. Screw to metal-stud framing. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 1.2 Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing." Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. 2. 1.3 Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated. Textured Finishes: Three 12 by 12 inch samples for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. 1.4 Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. 2. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. 2.2 Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. PANELS, GENERAL A. 2.3 Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. B. Gypsum Board, Type C: resistive capability. 1. 2. 3. C. Manufactured to have increased fire- Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. Long Edges: Tapered. Location: Kitchen. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. 2. E. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Regular Type: 1. 2. D. American Gypsum Co. BPB America Inc. G-P Gypsum. Lafarge North America Inc. National Gypsum Company. PABCO Gypsum. Temple. USG Corporation. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). Long Edges: Tapered. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 3. 1. 2. 3. Location: Corridor walls and otherwise noted on the Drawings. Long Edges: Tapered. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado F. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board (Green Board): ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. 2. 2.4 Core: As indicated on Drawings. Locations: Within 5 feet of all water sources, as indicated on the Drawings. TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Shapes: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2. 3. 2.5 Cornerbead. Bullnose bead. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. Expansion (control) joint. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. Fry Reglet Corp. Gordon, Inc. Pittcon Industries. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. 2. C. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. 2. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. 3. 4. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 5. 2.6 Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. D. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. 2. 3. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch(6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-(6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.4 Type X: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings. Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. Moisture- Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 4. D. 3.5 Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. L-Bead: Use where indicated. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. 2. 3. 4. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. Level 3: Only where indicated on Drawings. Level 4: Only where indicated on Drawings, including substrate for wall vinyl, unless otherwise indicated. a. 5. Level 5: At all panel surfaces that will be exposed to view. Match new finish with existing adjacent surfaces. a. E. 3.6 Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: instructions. Finish according to manufacturer's written APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment and hand tools, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. 2. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 7 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 1.2 Quarry flooring tile. Cementitious backer units installed as part of tile installations. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints. C. Samples: 1. 2. 3. 1.3 Each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. Thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from one source or producer. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. TILING 093000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. 1.6 Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. 2.2 Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. TILE PRODUCTS A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. Tile Type T-1: Square-edged quarry floor tile. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Size: 6 by 6 inches. Thickness: 1/2 inch. Color: Adobe Brown (2) 0T05. Location: Kitchen 102. Grout Manufacturer: LATICRETE International, Inc.; SpectraLOCK (Basis-of-Design). a. b. C. Color: Chocolate Truffle 43. Maximum Size: 1/4 inch. Tile Type T-2: Quarry cove base tile. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. TILING Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.; Quarry Textures (Basis-of-Design). American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. Quarry Tile Co. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.; Quarry Textures (Basis-of-Design). 093000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Nominal Size: 5 by 6 inches. Thickness: 1/2 inch. Color: Adobe Brown Q-3565. Location: Kitchen 102. Grout Manufacturer: LATICRETE International, Inc.; SpectraLOCK (Basis-of-Design). a. b. 2.3 American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. Quarry Tile Co. Color: Chocolate Truffle 43. Maximum Size: 1/4 inch. ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Thresholds: Fabricate to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. 1. 2.4 Basis-of-Design Products: Schluter; Transition Threshold. SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B. Boiardi Products Corporation. Bonsal, W. R., Company. Bostik. C-Cure. Custom Building Products. DAP, Inc. LATICRETE International Inc. MAPEI Corporation. Summitville Tiles, Inc. TEC Specialty Products Inc. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. 2. 3. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry additive to which only water must be added. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. C. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3. D. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated. E. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. TILING One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 093000 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado a. Available Products: 1) 2) 3) 2. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Available Products: 1) 2) 3) 4) Bostik; Chem-Calk 550. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 245. Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan. Tremco, Inc.; THC-900. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials. C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, Bronze exposed-edge material. D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing. E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. TILING 093000 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. 2. H. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6. I. At mop sink, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11. J. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. 1. 2. 3. K. Tile floors in wet areas. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 1. 2. 3. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Porcelain Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Paver Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm). L. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. M. Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1. N. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 1. 2. 3. O. TILING Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Porcelain Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 093000 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior tile installation cement mortar bed (thickset) bonded to concrete; TCA F112. 1. 2. B. Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F113. 1. 2. C. Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Latex- portland cement mortar. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded and polymer-modified unsanded grout. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded and polymer-modified unsanded grout. Interior floor installation on crack-suppression membrane over concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F122. 1. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout. END OF SECTION 093000 TILING 093000 - 6 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical panel ceiling installation with hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items: C. Samples: For each exposed finish. D. Product test reports. E. Research/evaluation reports. F. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.4 Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAPaccredited laboratory. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 1.5 Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2.2 Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. Smoke-Developed Index: 25 or less. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. 2. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. E. Anchors in Concrete: Bonded anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING ACS-1 A. Basis-of-Design Product: product: 1. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following Fine Fissured 1728 Square Lay-in medium texture; Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. 2. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured). C. Color: Tech Black (BL). D. LR: Not less than .80. E. NRC: Not less than .55. F. CAC: Not less than 30. G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square Lay-In. H. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm). I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). J. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Basis-of-Design Product: product: 1. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tee System 7301, Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated, Hot-Dip Galvanized, G60 (Z180), Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation; with prefinished, cold-rolled, 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide aluminum caps on flanges. 1. 2. 3. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. Face Design: Flat, flush. Face Finish: Painted to match color of acoustical unit. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders. B. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. C. Fire-Rated Assembly: design. Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 1. 2. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 1.2 Resilient base. Resilient stair accessories. Resilient molding accessories. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base B-1: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. B. Johnsonite, Inc.; Millwork Resilient Wall Base, Mandalay MW-66-H6 (Basis-ofDesign). Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Roppe Corporation, USA. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2. 3. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). Style: Rectangular shaped profile with a 45° chamfer top. C. Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.52 mm). D. Height: 6 inches (15.24 cm). E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Job formed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I. Color: Either Ore 66. J. Locations: Standard, UNO; do not use over brick. 2.2 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Stair Treads ACC-5: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. 3. 4. Resilient Stair Treads Standard: ASTM F 2169. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). Surface Design: a. 5. 6. 2.3 Class 2, Pattern: Raised hammered pattern. Manufacturing Method: Group 1, tread with embedded abrasive strips or Group 2, tread with contrasting color for the visually impaired. Nosing Product ACC-4: VCD-40, Black 40; Johnsonite, Inc. (Basis-of-Design). a. b. 7. 8. Johnsonite, Inc. (Basis-of-Design). Roppe Corporation, USA. Dimensions: 1/4 by 1-9/16 by 1-9/16 inches. Location: Platform stair tread at Banquette. Color: Black 40. Location: Platform stairs at Banquette. RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Resilient Molding Accessory: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. Johnsonite. Roppe Corporation, USA. Schluter. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Description: Nosing for resilient floor covering, reducer strip for resilient floor covering, transition strips. C. Material: As indicated on Drawings. D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. E. 3.3 Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. 2. C. 3.5 Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and/or resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. 2. 3. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes solid vinyl floor tile. B. Related section Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. D. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. 1.4 Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE VIN-1 A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturer offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include only the following: 1. B. Centiva, a division of International Floors of America, Inc.; C-Tech (Basis-of-Design). Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700. 1. 2. Class: Class III, printed film vinyl tile. Type: Type B, embossed surface. C. Wearlayer Thickness: .032 inch clear, rigid high density PVC. D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm). F. Edge: Square, slight bevel. G. Series: Victory. H. Colors: CT-9242-V, Dark Iron Crushed. I. Surface Texture: Frost (FR). J. Location: Bar front, as indicated on Drawings. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2. 3. 4. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. b. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. E. 3.2 Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. C. Lay tiles square with room axis. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern). D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. C. Apply one, two or three coat(s) according to the tile manufacturer’s recommendations. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular, tufted carpet tile. B. Related Requirements: 1. 2. 1.2 Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. 1.3 Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. 2. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. C. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. Type of subfloor. Type of installation. Pattern of installation. Pattern type, location, and direction. Pile direction. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. Transition details to other flooring materials. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. 2. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: Samples. 12-inch- (300-mm-) long D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado G. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. 2. 1.4 Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 1.5 Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. 1.7 Comply with CRI 104. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2. 3. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of face fiber, and delamination. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE CPT-1 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Dreams, Modular; Mannington Commercial, a Business Unit of Mannington Mills, Inc. B. Color: Trance (TRAC). C. Pattern: Dreams. D. Fiber Type: Antron Lumena solution dyed nylon. E. Pile Characteristic: Patterned loop pile. F. Pile Thickness: .100 inch for finished carpet tile. G. Stitches: 8.16 per inch (mm)>. H. Gage: 1/12 ends per inch (mm)>. I. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer’s standard 100% synthetic. J. Primary Precoat: Manufacturer’s standard 100% vinyl non-aqueous closed cell polymer. K. Secondary Backing: Infinity RE with a minimum 10% post-consumer and 20% pre-consumer recycled content by total product weight. L. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). M. Installation Method: Quarter turn, direct-glue. N. Location: As indicated on Drawings. O. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.2 Appearance Retention Rating: Moderate traffic, 2.5 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. Methenamine Pill Test per ASTM-D-2859: Must pass. CARPET TILE CPT-2 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers that may provide products incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Mannington Commercial, a Business Unit of Mannington Mills, Inc. Mohawk. Shaw Industries Group, Inc. Tandus US, Inc. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Pattern, Color and Size: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. C. Installation Method: Quarter turn, direct-glue. D. Locations: As indicated on Drawings. E. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.3 Appearance Retention Rating: Moderate traffic, 2.5 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. Methenamine Pill Test per ASTM-D-2859: Must pass. CRI Green Label Plus ID: GLP7616 (CRI Indoor Air Quality Control). INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. C. For painted subfloors, verify the following: 1. D. 3.2 Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. Perform bond test recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. TILE CARPETING 096813 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive; per manufacturer’s instructions. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. 2. 3. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes vinyl wall coverings. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. placement, seams and termination points. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of wall covering indicated. D. Samples for Verification: Full width by 36-inch- (914-mm-) long section of wall covering. E. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 Indicate pattern QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings and adhesives with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: a. b. 2. 3. 1.4 Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings complying with acceptance criteria of UBC Standard 8-2. Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings tested according to NFPA 265 and complying with Method A test protocol in IBC 2000, Section 803.5.1. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rolls of Wall-Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL COVERINGS A. 2.2 General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from same print run or dye lot. VINYL WALL COVERING WC-1 A. Vinyl Wall-Covering Standards: Provide products complying with the following: 1. 2. FS CCC-W-408D and CFFA-W-101-D for Type II, Medium -Duty products. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturer offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include only the following: a. Tri-Kes Wallcoverings, Source One (Basis-of-Design). B. Weight: 14 oz/sq yd. C. Width: 36 inches. D. Backing: Osnaburg fabric. E. Pattern: Wani. F. Pattern Match: 5-1/2 inches V, do not reverse, straight match. G. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. H. Location: Bar face. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. 1. Use only a heavy-duty, clay based vinyl adhesive, non-transparent per manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Division 09 Section "Painting" and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate. C. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wallcovering manufacturer. WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado D. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. E. Metal Primer: Interior ferrous metal primer complying with Division 09 Section "Painting." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal primer. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall-covering manufacturer. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. C. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. D. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. B. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. C. Install reversing every other strip. D. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. E. Match pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finish floor. F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches (75 mm) from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. G. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. H. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. without any overlay or spacing between strips. 3.3 Butt seams CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. END OF SECTION 097200 WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. 2. 1.2 Steel. Gypsum board. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. C. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 1.3 Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. 2. B. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. b. 2. 3. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. INTERIOR PAINTING If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 099123 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. 2. 1.5 Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. 2. B. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following products by one of the following manufacturers unless otherwise approved by the UCCS Project Manager: 1. 2. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Super Paint Interior Latex (Basis-of-Design). Benjamin Moore & Co.; Eco-Spec. C. Finish: Satin. D. Locations: As indicated on Drawings. E. Colors: 1. 2. 3. 2.2 PT-1: Empire Gold SW0012. PT-2: Antiquarian Brown SW0045. PT-3: Fireweed SW6328. PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 1. 2. B. VOC Content: E Range of E2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2.3 METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. C. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107. D. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26. E. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134. 2.4 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4). 1. 2. 2.5 VOC Content: E Range of E2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2. ALKYD PAINTS A. 2.6 Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5). QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS A. 2.7 Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5). TEXTURED COATING A. 2.8 Textured Coating, Latex, Flat: MPI #42. FLOOR COATINGS A. Interior Concrete Floor Stain: MPI #58. 1. 2. B. VOC Content: E Range of E2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is light orange peel texture. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. 3.2 Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. PREPARATION AND APPLICATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections according to manufacturer’s instructions. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. Electrical Work: a. b. c. 3.3 Uninsulated metal piping. Uninsulated plastic piping. Pipe hangers and supports. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. Switchgear. Panelboards. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.4 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. B. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (satin). Gypsum Board Substrates: Sheetrock as referenced on Drawings. 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell). END OF SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.2 Panel signs. Vinyl appliqué signage. DEFINITIONS A. 1.3 ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available. D. Samples for Verification: For each products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated. E. Sign Schedule: Use designations provided by Owner. F. Qualification Data: For Installer. G. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. C. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. SIGNAGE 101400 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines, ICC/ANSI A117.1, Life and Safety regulations in accordance with Local Code Authority. 1. 1.5 ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1 require tactile and Braille characters to be raised a minimum of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) from face of sign. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. 1.6 Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. COORDINATION A. 1.7 Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). B. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.2 Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in. (854 J/m) per ASTM D 256, Method A. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq. in. (62 MPa) per ASTM D 638. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. (2345 MPa) per ASTM D 790. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F (129 deg C) at 264 lbf/sq. in. (1.82 MPa) per ASTM D 648. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044. PANEL SIGNS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following: 1. SIGNAGE Interface Signs, Art and Media Limited. 101400 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Size: To match Architect’s sample Finish: To match existing. Lens: To match existing. Inserts: Paper color to be selected from manufacturer’s standard range. a. 5. 6. 7. 8. 2.3 Printing: UCCS logo, approved verbiage and horizontal rule line at junction of lenses. Edge/Corner Condition: To match existing. Mounting: As indicated. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) above surface with contrasting colors. VINYL APPLIQUE SIGNAGE A. Cutout Characters: requirements: 1. 2.4 Comply with the following Vinyl: Pressure sensitive. a. b. 2. 3. Provide characters with smooth edges. Type: Semi-transparent frosted. Color: As indicated on Drawings. Mounting: Adhesive for glass substrate. Printing: As indicated on Drawings. ACCESSORIES A. 2.5 Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. SIGNAGE Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. 101400 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for [three] [five] years for application intended. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, and electrical power are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. B. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. 2. 3. 4. SIGNAGE Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Magnetic Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. 101400 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 5. 6. 3.3 Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE 101400 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 1.2 Opaque, plastic corner guards. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide handrails capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. 2. 3. 1.3 Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection unit. B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit indicated. 1. D. Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color selection. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field splices. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, from manufacturer. G. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance manuals. 1. H. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impactresistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 1. 1.5 Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. 1.6 Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. 1.7 Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period. WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. 1.8 Structural failures. Deterioration of materials beyond normal use. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Include mounting and accessory components. production run as installed units. WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Replacement materials shall be from same 102600 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impactresistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material, thickness as indicated. B. Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PC01, Class 1 or 2, abrasion resistant; with a minimum impact-resistance rating of 15 ft-lbf/in. (800 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A. C. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.2 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface-Mounted, Opaque-Plastic Corner Guards CRN-1: Fabricated from PVC plastic, acrylicmodified vinyl sheet or opaque polycarbonate sheet; with formed edges; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.3 American Floor Products Co., Inc. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. Balco, Inc. Construction Specialties, Inc. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation. WallGuard.com. Wing Size: As indicated on Drawings. Mounting: Adhesive. Location: As indicated on Drawings. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. FABRICATION A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components. B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling. C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection system components. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. END OF SECTION 102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 113250 – VISUAL MOUNTING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes LCD mounting equipment. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of mounting equipment specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of mounting equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain mounting equipment through one source from a single manufacturer. Obtain each as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories. B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of mounting equipment with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LCD MOUNTING EQUIPMENT A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. B. LevelMount, by Elexa Consumer Products, Inc. (Or equal). Capabilities: 1. 2. Type 1: Full motion adjustable; universal pan, tilt, extend. Type 2: Standard height adjustment. C. Weight Capacity: Up to 100 lbs. D. Displays Up To: 37 inches: E. Color: Black. F. Locations: As indicated on the Drawings. VISUAL MOUNTING EQUIPMENT 113250 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify the Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Clean Surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. D. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. 3.3 General: Install mounting equipment at locations indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 113250 VISUAL MOUNTING EQUIPMENT 113250 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 114000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Refer to sheets attached after this section. END OF SECTION 114000 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT 114000 - 1 3/12/2010 UCCS_PUB SPECIFICATIONS Project: UCCS PUB-BAR From: To: United Restaurant Supply- Col Sp Jon Bluhm 725 Clark Pl. Colorado Spgs, CO 80915 Phone: (719) 574-3200 Item No. 1 - 3 COMP BAR SINK - OF/CI Item No. 2 - BAR DIE WALL AND TOP - OF/CI Item No. 3 - POS SYSTEM, OF/CI Item No. 4 - HAND SINKS, OF/CI Item No. 5 - Backbar Storage Cabinet, Refrigerated (1 REQ'D) True Food Service Equipment, Inc Model TBB-24GAL-72G Back Bar Cooler, three-section, 24" deep, 34-1/2" high, (150) 6-pack, (4) shelves, condensing unit left, galvanized sub top, galvanized interior with 300 series s/s floor, black vinyl exterior, (3) glass doors, fluorescent interior lights, 1/3 HP, 115v/60/1-ph, NEMA 5-15P, 7.5 amps, MADE IN AMERICA Accessories: 1 ea Self-contained refrigeration standard 1 ea Warranty - 5 year compressor (self-contained only), applicable to US and Canada 1 ea Warranty - 1 year parts and labor, applicable to US and Canada Item No. 6- Backbar Storage Cabinet, Refrigerated (1 REQ'D) True Food Service Equipment, Inc Model TBB-24GAL-48 Back Bar Cooler, two-section, 24" deep, 34-1/2" high, (82) 6-pack or (2) keg capacity, (4) shelves, condensing unit on left, galvanized sub top, galvanized interior with 300 series s/s floor, black vinyl exterior, (2) doors, fluorescent interior lights, 1/3 HP, 115v/60/1-ph, NEMA 5-15P, 7.0 amps, MADE IN AMERICA Accessories: 1 ea Self-contained refrigeration standard UCCS PUB-BAR United Restaurant Supply- Col Sp Page 1 of 5 3/12/2010 UCCS_PUB UCCS PUB-BAR 1 ea 1 ea Item No. 6A - Warranty - 5 year compressor (self-contained only), applicable to US and Canada Warranty - 1 year parts and labor, applicable to US and Canada *** Alternate *** Backbar Storage Cabinet, Refrigerated (1 REQ'D) True Food Service Equipment, Inc Model TBB-24GAL-72 *****ADD ALTERNATE #1******Back Bar Cooler, three-section, 24" deep, 34-1/2" high, (150) 6-pack or (3) keg capacity, (4) shelves, condensing unit on left, galvanized sub top, galvanized interior with 300 series s/s floor, black vinyl exterior, (3) doors, fluorescent interior lights, 1/3 HP, 115v/60/1-ph, NEMA 5-15P, 7.5 amps, MADE IN AMERICA Accessories: 1 ea *** Alternate *** Self-contained refrigeration standard 1 ea *** Alternate *** Warranty - 5 year compressor (self-contained only), applicable to US and Canada 1 ea *** Alternate *** Warranty - 1 year parts and labor, applicable to US and Canada Item No. 7 - Draft Beer Dispensing Tower Head Unit (1 REQ'D) Perlick Corporation Model 4006-2B Tee Tower, single base, for beer system, includes (2) 9-1/2" faucets, (black handles not included), stainless steel finish Accessories: 1 ea Model 62302 Cutout Drainer, for beer dispensing units, 16" x 8-7/8", brass finish Item No. 8 - SPARE NO. Item No. 9 - BACK BAR COUNTERS, BY MILLWORK Item No. 10 - Ice Bin, Mobile (1 REQ'D) Follett Corporation Model LSC125 SmartCART™ 125, mobile, insulated, polyethylene, hinged lid, 125-lb capacity Item No. 11 - Work Table, 72" Long (1 REQ'D) Prairie View Industries Model 16GASTBS303672 Work Table, 30"D x 72"L x 36"H, 16 gauge stainless steel top with 6" backsplash & aluminum undershelf Accessories: 1 ea Model SUD2020 Drawer, 20"L x 5"H x 20"D, stainless steel, for use with any PVI table, must be purchased at time of table purchase Item No. 12 - Equipment Stand (1 REQ'D) Prairie View Industries Model N242424-2 Equipment Stand, 2 shelves, open base, 24"W x 24"H x 24"L, heavy duty non-rustable aluminum construction, solid sheet adjustable shelves with 1/8" marine edge, lock bushing assembly, 400 lb. capacity per shelf, shipped KD, NSF, UPS shippable UCCS PUB-BAR United Restaurant Supply- Col Sp Page 2 of 5 3/12/2010 UCCS_PUB UCCS PUB-BAR bushing assembly, 400 lb. capacity per shelf, shipped KD, NSF, UPS shippable Accessories: 1 ea Feet, standard, nc Item No. 13 - SODA BAR GUN, BY PERVEYOR Item No. 14 - Smoothie Machine / Blender- OF/CI Item No. 15 - Refrigerator, Reach-in (1 REQ'D) True Food Service Equipment, Inc Model T-23 Refrigerator, Reach-in, one-section, 23 cu. ft., (3) shelves, 300 series s/s front & aluminum ends exterior, white aluminum with 300 series s/s floor interior, (1) s/s hinged door with lock, dial thermometer, 4" castors, 1/3 HP, 115v/60/1-ph, NEMA 5-15P, 7.6 amps, ENERGY STAR®, MADE IN AMERICA Accessories: 1 ea Self-contained refrigeration standard 1 ea 4" Swivel castors, standard (adds 5" to OA height) 1 ea Warranty - 5 year compressor (self-contained only), applicable to US and Canada 1 ea Warranty - 1 year parts and labor, applicable to US and Canada 1 ea Door hinged right standard Item No. 16 - Freezer, Reach-in (1 REQ'D) True Food Service Equipment, Inc Model T-23F Freezer, Reach-in, one-section, -10° F, 23 cu. ft., (3) shelves, 300 series s/s front & aluminum ends exterior, white aluminum with 300 series s/s floor interior, (1) s/s hinged door with lock, dial thermometer, 4" castors, 1/2HP, 115v/60/1-ph, NEMA 5-15P, 7.2 amps, ENERGY STAR®, MADE IN AMERICA Accessories: 1 ea Self-contained refrigeration standard 1 ea 4" Swivel castors, standard (adds 5" to OA height) 1 ea Warranty - 5 year compressor (self-contained only), applicable to US and Canada 1 ea Warranty - 1 year parts and labor, applicable to US and Canada 1 ea Door hinged right standard Item No. 17 - Work Table, 72" Long (1 REQ'D) Prairie View Industries Model 16GASTBS303672 Work Table, 30"D x 72"L x 36"H, 16 gauge stainless steel top with 6" backsplash & aluminum undershelf Accessories: 1 ea Model SUD2020 Drawer, 20"L x 5"H x 20"D, stainless steel, for use with any PVI table, must be purchased at time of table purchase Item No. 18 - Microwave/Convection Oven (1 REQ'D) Turbochef Model TORNADO 2 Tornado 2™ Rapid Cook Oven, electric, ventless, countertop, stackable, 128 cooking profiles, internal catalytic converter, pull down door with handle, multi-speed convec. blower, includes (2) teflon baskets, oven cleaner, oven guard, (1) aluminum paddle, (2) trigger sprayers, s/s front, top & sides, 4" legs, NSF, UL UCCS PUB-BAR United Restaurant Supply- Col Sp Page 3 of 5 3/12/2010 UCCS_PUB UCCS PUB-BAR profiles, internal catalytic converter, pull down door with handle, multi-speed convec. blower, includes (2) teflon baskets, oven cleaner, oven guard, (1) aluminum paddle, (2) trigger sprayers, s/s front, top & sides, 4" legs, NSF, UL Accessories: 1 ea One year parts and labor warranty 1 ea 208/240v/60/1ph, 30.0amps, NEMA 6-30P Item No. 19 - Griddle, Counter Unit, Gas (1 REQ'D) Garland/US Range Model G24-36GTHX G Starfire Pro Series Griddle, gas, 36"W, countertop, 36" x 24" x 3/4" thick smooth steel griddle plate, Snap-Action thermostatic controls, king size grease bucket (1-3/4 gallon capacity), welded splash guard on rear & ends, s/s front, black sides, 90,000 BTU (Garland) Accessories: 1 ea One year limited parts and labor warranty, covers products purchased and installed in the USA only, standard 1 ea Gas type to be specified 1 ea Model CS24-36 Equipment Stand, E24 & G24 Series, 36" W, 24-1/2" H, tubular legs w/undershelf, black powder coated epoxy finish (Garland) 1 ea Dormont Manufacturing Model 1675KITS48 Safety System Moveable Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside dia., 48" long, covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1 SnapFast™ QD, 1 SwivelMAX™, 1 full port valve, 1 elbow, coiled restraining cable with hardware, limited lifetime warranty Item No. 20 - Fryer, Floor Model, Gas, Full Pot (1 REQ'D) Dean Industries Model D50G-C Decathlon Fryer, Gas-fired, heavy-duty floor model, 35-50 pound fat capacity, with computer controls, s/s pot, door & sides, 6" legs, 120,000 BTU Accessories: 1 ea Gas type to be specified 1 ea Electrical specs must be specified 1 ea Casters, set of 4 (2) with brakes, in lieu of std. legs 1 ea Model 806-1699 Quick Disconnect, 1" x 48" Item No. 20.1 - *** Optional *** Fryer, Floor Model, Gas, Full Pot (1 REQ'D) Dean Industries Model D50G-C Decathlon Fryer, Gas-fired, heavy-duty floor model, 35-50 pound fat capacity, with computer controls, s/s pot, door & sides, 6" legs, 120,000 BTU Accessories: 1 ea *** Optional *** Gas type to be specified 1 ea *** Optional *** Electrical specs must be specified 1 ea *** Optional *** Casters, set of 4 (2) with brakes, in lieu of std. legs 1 ea *** Optional *** Model 806-1699 Quick Disconnect, 1" x 48" Item No. 21 - EXHAUST HOOD, M.E.P. CONTRACTOR Item No. 22 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM, M.E.P. CONTRACTOR UCCS PUB-BAR United Restaurant Supply- Col Sp Page 4 of 5 3/12/2010 UCCS_PUB UCCS PUB-BAR Item No. 22 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM, M.E.P. CONTRACTOR Item No. 23 - Fabrication (1 REQ'D) Custom Model S/S WALL FLASHING S/S Wall flashing, per shop drawing. Item No. 24 - Shelving Unit, Wire (2 REQ'D) Focus Foodservice Model 21856 Shelving Kit, medium duty, 18"W x 36"D x 72"H, (5) shelf unit, black epoxy coated Item No. 25 - PREP SINK, OF/CI Item No. 26 - WALL SHELF, OF/CI Item No. 27 - Work Table, 36" Long (1 REQ'D) Prairie View Industries Model 16GASTBS303636 Work Table, 30"D x 36"L x 36"H, 16 gauge stainless steel top with 6" backsplash & aluminum undershelf Item No. 28 - HOT WATER TANK, M.E.P. CONTRACTOR Item No. 29 - MOP SINK, M.E.P. CONTRACTOR Item No. 30 - CUSTOM (2 REQ'D) Nationwide Fabricators Model CORNER GUARDS S/S 2"x2"x48" UCCS PUB-BAR United Restaurant Supply- Col Sp Page 5 of 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 115213 - PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes front-projection screens. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 1.2 Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork " for wood backing for recessed screen installation. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections including metal device boxes for switches and conduit, where required, for low-voltage control wiring. DEFINITIONS A. Gain: Ratio of light reflected from or refracted by screen material to that reflected perpendicularly from a magnesium carbonate surface as determined per FS GG-S-00172D(1). B. Half-Gain Angle: The angle, measured from the axis of the screen surface, to the most central position on perpendicular plane through the horizontal centerline of the screen where the gain is half of the peak gain. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of screen specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of projection screens. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1.4 Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case. Location of wiring connections. Location of seams in viewing surfaces. Connections to suspension systems for pendant- and recess-mounted screens. Anchorage details. Details of juncture of exposed surfaces with adjacent finishes. Frame details. Accessories. Wiring Diagrams: For electrically operated units. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain projection screens through one source from a single manufacturer. Obtain each screen as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories. B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions. PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to begin. B. Protect surfaces of rear-projection screens from damage due to abrasion, dust, and other conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREENS A. Material and Viewing Surface of Front-Projection Screens: Provide screens manufactured from mildew- and flame-resistant fabric of type indicated for each type of screen specified and complying with the following requirements: 1. Glass-beaded, White Matte viewing surface with gain characteristics complying with FS GG-S-00172D(1) for Type C screen surface. a. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Peak gain of 2.0, and half-gain angle of at least 25 degrees. Material: Vinyl-coated glass-fiber fabric. Mildew Resistance: Provide mildew-resistant screen fabrics as determined by FS 191A/5760. Seamless Construction: Provide screens in sizes indicated without seams. Edge Treatment: Without black masking borders. Size of Viewing Surface: 72 inch (W) by 96 inch (H), recessed ceiling mounted electric screen. Electrically Operated Screens, General: Provide manufacturer's standard UL-labeled units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation. Remotely control operation of each screen to comply with the following: 1. Single-Station Control: 3-position control switch with metal device box and cover plate for flush wall mounting and for connection to 120-V, ac power supply. a. 2. 3. Provide key-operated switch. Motor: Provide either motor in roller. Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to rigid metal roller and bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter, metal rod with ends of rod protected by plastic caps. PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure: Units designed and fabricated for recessed installation in ceiling with bottom of case composed of 2 panels fully enclosing screen, motor, and wiring; 1 panel hinged and designed to open and close automatically when screen is lowered and fully raised, designed to stop at any position, controlled with 3 position key switch, and the other panel removable or openable for access to interior of case; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Screen Case with Motor in Roller: Aluminum framing with side, end, and top panels of fire-retardant hardboard or ABS plastic and with stainless steel (satin finish) bottom panels as follows: a. b. D. Offset mount bottom panels so their bottom surface will align flush with adjoining ceiling and the bottom edges of case sides and ends will be recessed behind ceiling finish. Provide single or double top as standard with manufacturer. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following. 1. Glass-Beaded Viewing Surfaces: a. b. c. 2. Glass Bead, White Matte, Video Spectra 1.5; Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc. High Power; Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc. Glass Beaded; Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc. Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure, Motor in Roller: a. b. c. Boardroom Electrol; Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc. Envoy; Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc. Signature; Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and relationship to adjoining construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is lowered. 1. 3.2 Test electrically operated units to verify that screen, controls, limit switches, closure, and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition. PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage during construction. If damage occurs despite such protection, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition. END OF SECTION 115213 PROJECTION SCREENS 115213 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 123640 - STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes stone countertops. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: 1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square. Include two or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in completed Work. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Sealant Compatibility Test Report: From sealant manufacturer, complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone. F. Maintenance Data: For stone countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer, and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate stone countertops similar to that indicated for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1. 2. Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section of the Specifications. Make stone slabs available for Architect to examine for appearance characteristics. a. b. c. Architect will select aesthetically acceptable slabs and will indicate aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs. Segregate slabs selected for use on Project and mark backs indicating approval. Mark and photograph aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs as directed by Architect. STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports. B. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining separators and nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE COUNTERTOPS A. Quartz STN-1: 1. 2. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual." Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 3. Provide sound natural stone as follows: a. b. c. 4. 5. 6. 2.2 Maximum Absorption per ASTM D 570: Less than 0.011%. Minimum Flexural Strength per ASTM D 790: 42.4 MPa. Stone Abrasion Resistance per ASTM D 4060: 1094 mg. Color: Odyssey RM501. Finish: Match Architect's sample. Thickness: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). a. b. 7. 8. 9. HanStone Quartz Surfaces, a division of the Hanwha Group; Romantic Series (Basis-of-Design). Double thickness at Bar Top. Single thickness at Back Bar. Edge Detail: Eased. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints. Location: Bar Top and Back Bar Countertops. ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated. B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. Bonsal, W. R. Company. Bonstone Materials Corporation. C-Cure. Custom Building Products. STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado e. f. g. C. Laticrete International, Inc. MAPEI Corp. Summitville Tiles, Inc. Stone Adhesive: Two-part epoxy or polyester adhesive, formulated specifically for bonding stone to stone, with an initial set time of not more than two hours at 70 deg F (21 deg C). 1. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Epoxy Adhesive: Akemi North America; Akepox. Epoxy Adhesive: Axson North America, Inc., Wood & Stone Company; Akabond Epoxy. Epoxy Adhesive: Bonstone Materials Corporation; Touchstone Ratio Pac Clear Gel Epoxy. Epoxy Adhesive: Bonstone Materials Corporation; Touchstone Last Patch. Polyester Adhesive: Akemi North America; Platinum Clear Polyester Adhesive. Polyester Adhesive: Axson North America, Inc., Wood & Stone Company; Wood & Stone Polyester. Polyester Adhesive: Bonstone Materials Corporation; Gripstone L-200KG. D. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that complies with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the stone it is applied to. E. Stone Joint Splines: Stainless-steel or brass washers approximately 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter and of thickness to fit snugly in saw-cut kerf in edge of stone units. F. Stone Cleaner: Cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives. 2.3 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function. B. Grade and mark stone for final locations to produce assembled countertop units with an overall uniform appearance. C. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 2. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and attachments. 4. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work. 5. Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length of edge and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints between units. Form corners of molded edges as indicated with outside corners slightly eased, unless otherwise indicated. STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 6. D. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each type of stone required and to match approved Samples and mockups. Provide matching finish on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates indicated to receive stone countertops and conditions under which stone countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. 2. 3.2 For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone countertops. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts and similar items to be used by stone countertop Installer for anchoring stone countertops. Furnish installers of other work with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items. B. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. Allow stone to dry before installing. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/16 inch in 48 inches (1.5 mm in 1200 mm). B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/4 of nominal joint width. D. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. E. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS A. General: Install countertops by adhering to supports with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Do not cut stone in field, unless otherwise indicated. If stone countertops or splashes require additional fabrication not specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for adjustment. C. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight, true, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Shim and adjust stone to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. Install anchors and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone countertops in place. E. Apply sealant to gaps specified for filling with sealant; comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealant. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. mortar, and sealant smears immediately. B. Remove and replace stone countertops of the following description: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove adhesive, grout, Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. Defective countertops. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. Interior stone countertops and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. Interior stone countertops not complying with other requirements indicated. C. Replace in a manner that results in stone countertops matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. D. Clean stone countertops not less than six days after completion of installation, using clean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone. END OF SECTION 123640 STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 21 23 00 – ANSUL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. WORK INCLUDED Provide exhaust systems in accordance with the drawings and this Section to yield a complete exhaust system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL KITCHEN HOOD FIRE PROTECTION A. An Ansul R-102 Fire Suppression System shall be furnished. The system shall be capable of protecting all hazard areas associated with cooking equipment. • • REFERENCES Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL Standard 1254 UL Standard 300 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 96 NFPA 17A B. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The system shall be an automatic fire suppression system using a wet chemical agent for grease related fires.The system shall be capable of suppressing fires in the following areasassociated with cooking equipment: ventilating equipment including hoods, ducts, plenums, and filters; fryers; griddles and range tops; upright, natural charcoal, or chain-type broilers; electric, lava rock, mesquite or gas-radiant char-broilers.The system shall be the pre-engineered type having minimum and maximum guidelines established by the manufacturer and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).The system shall be installed and serviced by personnel trained by the manufacturer. C. QUALITY CONTROL Manufacturer: The R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System shall be manufactured by a company with at least thirty years experience in the design and manufacture of pre-engineered fire suppression systems. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9002 registered. Certificates: The wet agent shall be a specially formulated, aqueous solution of organic salts with a pH range between 7.8 - 8.2, designed for flame knockdown and foam securement of grease-related fires. D. WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER, AND LIMITATIONS The pre-engineered restaurant fire suppression system components shall be warranted for five years from date of delivery against defects in workmanship and material. E. DELIVERY Packaging: All system components shall be securely packaged to provide protection during shipment. F. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS The R-102 system shall be capable of operating in a temperature range of 32°F to 130°F (0°C to 54°C). ANSUL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 212300 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado G. PRODUCT • • • • • • • • • • • • Manufacturer: Ansul Fire Protection One Stanton Street Marinette, Wisconsin 54143-2542 Telephone (715) 735-7411 Components: The basic system shall consist of an ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which includes a regulated release mechanism and a wet chemical storage tank housed within a single enclosure. Nozzles, blow-off caps, detectors, cartridges, agent, fusible links, and pulley elbows shall be supplied in separate packages in the quantities needed for fire suppression system arrangements. Additional equipment shall include remote manual pull station, mechanical and electrical gas valves, pressure switches, and electrical switches for automatic equipment and gas line shut-off. Wet Chemical Agent: The extinguishing agent shall be a specially formulated, aqueous solution of organic salts with a pH range between 7.8 - 8.2, designed for flame knockdown and foam securement of grease related fires. Agent Tank: The agent tank shall be installed in a stainless steel enclosure or wall bracket. The tank shall be deep drawn carbon steel finished in red enamel. Tanks shall be available in two sizes; 1.5 gallon (5.7 L) and 3.0 gallon (11.4 L).The tanks shall have a working pressure of 100 psi (6.9 bar), a test pressure of 300 psi (20.7 bar), and a minimum burst pressure of 600 psi (41.4 bar). The tank shall include an adaptor/tube assembly containing a burst disc union. Regulated Release Mechanism: The regulated release mechanism shall be a springloaded, mechanical/pneumatic type capable of providing the expellant gas supply to one or two agent tanks depending on the capacity of the gas cartridge used. It shall contain a factory installed regulator deadset at 100 psi (6.9 bar) with an internal relief of approximately 145 psi (10.0 bar). It shall have the following actuation capabilities: automatic actuation by a fusible link detection system and remote manual actuation by a mechanical pull station. The regulated release mechanism shall contain a release assembly, regulator, expellant gas hose, and agent storage tank housed in a stainless steel enclosure with cover. The enclosure shall contain knock-outs for 1/2 in. conduit. The cover shall contain an opening for a visual status indicator.It shall be compatible with mechanical gas shut-off devices; or, when equipped with a field or factory-installed switch, it shall be compatible with electric gas line or appliance shut-off devices. Regulated Actuator Assembly: When more than two agent tanks are required, the regulated actuator shall be available to provide expellant gas for additional tanks. It shall be connected to the cartridge receiver outlet of the regulated release mechanism providing simultaneous agent discharge. The regulator shall be deadset at 100 psi (6.9 bar) with an internal relief of approximately 145 psi (10.0 bar). The regulated actuator assembly shall contain a regulated actuator, regulator, expellant gas hose, and agent tank housed in a stainless steel enclosure with cover. The enclosure shall contain knockouts to permit installation of the expellant gas line. Discharge Nozzles: Each discharge nozzle shall be tested and listed with the R-102 system for a specific application. Nozzles tips shall be stamped with the flow number designation (1/2, 1, 2, and 3). Each nozzle shall have a metal or rubber blow-off cap to keep the nozzle tip orifice free of cooking grease build-up. Distribution Piping: Distribution piping shall be Schedule 40 black iron, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A120, A53, or A106. Detectors: The detectors shall be the fusible link style designed to separate at a specific temperature. Cartridges: The cartridge shall be a sealed steel pressure vessel containing either carbon dioxide or nitrogen gas. The cartridge seal shall be designed to be punctured by the releasing device supplying the required pressure to expel wet chemical agent from the storage tank. ANSUL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 212300 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado H. IMPLEMENTATION • • Installation: The R-102 fire suppression system shall be designed, installed, inspected, maintained, and recharged in accordance with the manufacturer's listed instruction manual. Training: Training shall be conducted by representatives of the manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install per Drawings and manufacturers' recommendations. B. Provide 1 year limited parts warranty END OF SECTION ANSUL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 212300 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 22 00 00 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide complete plumbing systems including piping, fixtures, equipment, as shown and specified. B. Provide complete site utilities systems and connections to existing as shown and specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. PIPE AND FITTINGS Domestic Hot Water, Cold Water 1. C. Building interior a. Above ground: Type "L" hard copper with wrought copper fittings and 95/5 solder joints with no lead. b. Building entrance: Use any of following: (1) Type "K" soft copper with no joints below slab. (2) Type "K" hard copper with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints. (3) Type "K" hard copper with “press-fit” fittings and joints. Sanitary Drainage and Vent 1. Building interior: a. Service weight cast iron, either no-hub ends with elastomeric seals and stainless steel clamps or bell-and-spigot ends with elastomeric joints. b. PVC or ABS as approved by the Regional Building Department 2. Building exterior: Use any of following as approved by jurisdictional authorities: a. Service weight cast iron with bell-and-spigot ends and elastomeric joints. d. PVC per ASTM D3034, SDR 35, bell-and-spigot ends, elastomeric joints. D. Roof Drain Leaders – Same as sanitary drainage E. Equipment Drains and Overflows: Use any of following: 1. 2. PLUMBING Type "M" or DWV hard copper with sweat fittings, 50/50 solder. PVC with solvent weld fittings where approved. 2200600 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado F. 2.02 Natural Gas 1. Building interior: a. Concealed locations: Sch 40 black steel per ASTM A53, welded or flanged joints, grade WPB fittings per ASTM A234, grade I 150 lb. forged steel slip-on or weld neck flanges per ASTM A181, grade B regular square head flange bolts with heavy hex nuts per ASTM A307, 1/16" thick preformed synthetic rubber gaskets. b. Exposed location, 1-1/2" and smaller: Sch 40 black steel per ASTM A120, screwed joints, 150 lb. malleable iron fittings per ASTM A197. c. Exposed location, 2" and larger: Same as for concealed locations. 2. Building exterior: Use following as approved by jurisdictional authorities: a. Above grade: Same as within building. b. Buried: Sch 40 black steel per ASTM A53, welded joints, coated and wrapped per utility company requirements, cathodically protected as required. Or, approved plastic gas pipe. c. Meter risers: Per utility company. FIXTURES A. General: All exposed trim and piping shall be chrome plated. B. Provide fixtures as scheduled on the drawings. 2.03 METERS A. Gas: Furnished by Utility Company. B. Water: Furnished by Utility Company specs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. WATER SYSTEMS General: 1. 2. PLUMBING Keys: Deliver hydrant keys, hose bibb keys, stop keys, valve wrenches, etc., at project completion. Disinfection a. General: Disinfect all potable water systems. Test, clean and flush piping prior to disinfection. b. Disinfectant: Use liquid chlorine or sodium hypochlorite solutions; gaseous chlorine not permitted. Minimum concentration: 50 ppm. c. Procedure: Charge piping systems with disinfectant. Retain in system for minimum 8 hour contact period during which time open and close all valves and faucets at least three times. d. Flush: At end of contact period, flush system with potable water until residual chlorine content is less than 0.2 ppm. 2200600 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado B. Building interior 1. 2. 3.02 A. DRAINAGE SYSTEMS Building interior 1. 2. 3. 5. 6. 7. 3.03 A. General: Use materials specified for within building. Extend to 5 feet Building exterior. Testing: Use 150 psig hydrostatic test. General: Use materials specified for within building. Extend to 5 feet Building exterior. Minimum Slope a. Soil, waste, vent: 1/4" per foot for piping 4" and smaller, 1/8" per foot for piping 6" and larger. b. Roof drainage: 1/8" per foot or as shown on Drawings. Flashing a. Material: 24" x 24" 4 lb. sheet lead. b. Vents: Provide for all vents through roof. Extend flashing 5" above vent and turn down into pipe so as not to restrict or constrict the vent openings. c. Drains: Provide for all drains located in waterproofed floors and roofs. Center drain on flashing. Clamp flashing into drain flashing collar. 4. Prohibited Practices a. Bushings not allowed. b. Vents within 24" of parapets, roof edge, crickets, or adjacent wall not allowed. Drain and Cleanout Protection a. Provide test plugs in drains and cleanouts at time of installation to prevent the entrance of foreign matter. Leave plugs in place during construction. Replace plugs immediately with proper strainer/grate/dome when flooring/roofing is completed. Caution! Take all measures necessary to prevent structural failure as a result of water ponding. b. Protect strainers and cleanouts in finished areas during construction with selfadhesive tape. Replace as needed. Remove tape completely at project completion. Cleanouts: Provide where shown and required, for proper cleaning of entire drainage system. Provide full size of pipe on which installed, 4" maximum. Testing: Plug low points of system. Fill with water to uppermost outlet or to 12 feet high, whichever is greater. Let system stand full of water with no indication of leaks. NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS Building interior 1. 2. 3. PLUMBING General: Use materials specified for within building. Installations: Install per applicable codes and ordinances and per NFPA 54. Piping shall rise above grade prior to entering building. Make equipment connections with gas cock and union. Testing: a. Use either of following methods: (1) 50 psig air test for 24 hours without pressure loss. 2200600 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado b. B. Building exterior 1. 2. 3. 4. 3.04 (2) Soap test all joints with 100 psig air pressure within piping. Only the last connection to the appliance may be tested under operating conditions. Leak test this connection under operating pressure. This connection must remain exposed. General: Use materials specified for on site. Minimum bury: 2'-6". Installation: Per Utility Company requirements. Field wrap all buried joints same as for pipe. Provide cathodic protection as required. Testing: Per Utility Company requirements. FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT A. General: Set fixtures and equipment level and plumb. Securely mount to prevent any movement. Locate fixtures in accordance with Architectural Drawings paying particular attention to ADA requirements. B. Fixture Mounting Height: Comply as applicable with Architectural Drawings, manufacturers' installation instruction, governing codes regarding ADA access. C. Flush Valves: Securely anchor within wall so as to prevent movement due to operation of the valve. D. Aerators: Remove during construction. Install following system disinfection. 3.05 A. ADJUSTMENTS At project completion, adjust all plumbing systems, fixtures and equipment for proper operation under maximum flow/demand conditions. END OF SECTION PLUMBING 2200600 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 22 07 00 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED Provide insulation as shown and specified herein. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Hazard Classification: Tested as a composite in accordance with ASTM E84 or NFPA 255 or UL723 and so labeled. Max flame spread = 25, max smoke developed = 50. B. Energy Conservation: Comply with applicable energy codes. C. Prohibited Materials: Products or materials containing asbestos are expressly prohibited. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE INSULATION - MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Manville, Certainteed, Owens-Corning, Armstrong. B. Fiberglass: ASTM C547 Type 1. Maximum k/inch = 0.22 at 75 degrees F. All service jacket with self-sealing laps. Pre-molded fitting and valve covers with fiberglass inserts. C. Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric: ASTM C534 Type 1, and ASTM D1056. Maximum k/inch = 0.28 at 75 degrees F. D. All insulation shall have a maximum flame spread of 25, and developed smoke factor of 50 in accordance with ASTM E 84. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Apply insulation after systems have been tested. B. Comply with manufacturers recommendations regarding ambient and system temperatures and application methods. C. Apply insulation to clean, dry surfaces. D. Apply insulation with sections or edges firmly butted together. E. Run insulation continuous through sleeves and openings in walls and floors. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado F. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier on cold systems. Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier. Seal all vapor barrier penetrations. G. Repair insulation damaged due to strain or poor workmanship. H. Leave surfaces clean and ready for painting. I. Insulation which has been applied in an unsightly manner will be ordered replaced. 3.02 PIPE INSULATION - INSTALLATION A. General 1. Insulate pipe, fittings and valves. 2. Do not insulate unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, expansion joints. Terminate insulation neatly with insulating and finishing cement troweled on a bevel. 3. Insulated through hangers and supports. Use heavy density insert and sheet metal shield on 2” and larger, sheet metal shield on 1½” and smaller.. 4. For cold piping, seal fitting/valve covers at end and throat. B. Use 1. Fiberglass with longitudinal seams located away from normal lines of sight. 2. Fiberglass with metal jacket secured with draw bands 12" OC and sealed weather tight. For horizontal piping locate longitudinal seam and drawband clamp on underside of pipe. For girth joints in vertical piping, wrap upper jacket section around the lower section. C. Thickness: Insulate piping systems with thickness indicated in Table 3.03C. Insulate entire system to include valves (not handles), fittings and piping unless noted otherwise. Not all piping system types or sizes are necessarily used in this project. PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Table 3.03C INSULATION THICKNESS FOR PIPE SIZE RUNOUTS TO 1" 1" TO 1½” 2" TO 4" 5" TO 6" 8" & UP Domestic Cold Water ½" ½" ½" 1" 1" 1, 2,3 Domestic Hot Water 1” 1” 1” 1” - 2,3 Domestic Circulated 1” 1” 1" 1" - 2,3 Domestic Tempered 1” 1” 1" 1" - 2,3 PIPING SYSTEM NOTES Schedule Notes: 1. 2. 3. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier jacket. Insulation not required on fixture headers and fixture risers in plumbing chase. Insulate all above-ground horizontal lines and all lines in return air plenum. END OF SECTION PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 23 00 00 - BASIC REQUIREMENTS 1.01 GENERAL A. All provisions of the Contract Documents apply to the work of this Division. B. All Division 15 Section are subject to the provisions of this Section. 1.02 A. 1.03 SUMMARY OF WORK Work Included: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidental items necessary for completely finished and operational mechanical systems. DEFINITIONS A. Exposed: Exposed in mechanical rooms or rooms with finished walls or ceilings. B. Concealed: Located in pipe chases, furred spaces, attics, crawl spaces, above suspended ceilings, or all other locations not exposed to view. C. Provide: Furnish and install. 1.04 A. 1.05 A. 1.06 A. 1.07 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY Specification formatting which indicates a division in the mechanical work is for convenience only. It is not intended to delineate lines of responsibility between subcontractors and/or suppliers. Such delineation rests entirely with the contractor. EXISTING CONDITIONS Existing conditions as shown are approximate. The accuracy or completeness of the drawings is not assured; actual conditions may vary from that shown. Verify all conditions prior to fabrication and installation of mechanical or plumbing system components. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Plans are diagrammatic. They indicate general intent, design and arrangement of systems. Provide all minor incidentals such as offsets, fittings, etc., as may be required even though not shown. Provide isolation valves and unions as called for in these specifications whether or not shown on drawings. Do not scale the plans; take dimensions from actual field conditions. CODES AND REGULATIONS A. Conform to codes and regulations applicable at the project site. B. Call for inspections from local authorities as required. C. If discrepancies occur between contract documents and local regulations, the local regulations apply. BASIC REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1.08 FEES AND PERMITS A. Obtain required permits. B. Pay permit fees, construction fees, tap fees, inspection fees. C. Development fees paid by owner. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades to assure orderly progress of the work and to assure proper fit in confined spaces. B. Contractor to prepare coordination drawings to include ductwork, cable tray, sanitary waste lines, roof drain leaders, major electrical conduit, and major fire sprinkler lines. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with good trade practice and in a neat manner. B. Adhere to manufacturers' recommendations. 1.11 PROTECTION A. Of People: Arrange barriers, signs, etc. as required to minimize the hazard to people. Comply with applicable safety and health regulations. B. Of Work: Take all measures necessary to protect the work both before and after installation, to assure that it will be in clean, undamaged, unblemished condition when turned over to the Owner. Repair/replace work damaged during construction. 1.12 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at Job Site: Contract documents, reviewed submittals, field test records. B. As-Built Drawings: Revise the design drawings to reflect the as-built condition Using AutoCad MEP 2008 or greater. Dimensionally locate site utilities and underslab work. Identify major valves in accordance with valve tag list. Deliver as-built drawings on CD to Architect at project completion. 1.13 OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Format: 8-1/2"x11" loose-leaf hard cover, permanently labeled. All contents typed or neatly lettered. B. Contents: Each section set off by index tabs. Include: 1. Table of Contents. 2. Executed Warranties. BASIC REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. C. 1.14 Name, address and telephone number of installing contractors and subcontractors, along with brief description of their project responsibility. Name, address and telephone number of material and equipment suppliers, along with listing of items supplied. Brief narrative on each system including: a. System description. b. System start, operation, shutdown procedures. c. Emergency procedures for fire, failure, etc. d. Preventive maintenance program including cleaning, replacement, adjustment, lubrication schedules. Equipment tabs, minimum one tab for each applicable Division 15 Section, arranged in the same order as the specifications. Include for all equipment supplied: a. Reviewed submittals. b. Installation instructions. c. Operating instructions. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Parts lists. Balance report. Certificates of Inspection At project completion submit one copy of manual to Engineer for review. Make any corrections required. Transmit three corrected copies to General Contractor for delivery to Owner. WARRANTIES A. Provide warranty addressed to Owner covering all Division 15 work in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications. B. Include executed warranties in Operating & Maintenance Manuals. D. During warranty period provide labor and materials to repair or replace defects in Division 15 work. Pay for damage to other work resulting from defects in Division 15 work. 1.15 DEMONSTRATIONS A. Conduct demonstrations when systems are complete and operational and ready to be turned over to the owner, and after the Operating and Maintenance Manual is complete. B. Instruct the Owner's representative once on the proper operation and maintenance of the mechanical systems. Pay particular attention to normal and emergency start-up and shutdown procedures, seasonal change-over, safety devices, and temperature control systems. END OF SECTION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 23 05 00 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. WORK INCLUDED This Section describes materials and methods common to the work in general for Division 15. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS, STARTERS, MISC. ELECTRICAL A. Motors: Minimum horsepower as indicated herein or on drawings, constructed for operation at site altitude, dust proof/leak proof bearing rings, built to NEMA standards, factory balanced, open drip proof, thermal overload protected, 1.15 service factor at altitude, power factor corrected in accordance with applicable energy code, suitable for operation on voltage indicated. B. Magnetic Starters: Overload protection in each phase, fused control transformer with maximum 120V secondary, holding coils, integral HOA switch, integral red pilot light to signify "on", auxiliary contacts as required for system operation plus one spare. C. Manual Single-Speed Operating Switches: Maximum 120V, pilot duty or load rated as suits the application, with pilot light. Arrange light to extinguish if motor trips out on any safety device. Provide cover plate. See Division 24 for other requirements. C. Phase Reversal protection, single phasing protection: Provide for motors 10 horsepower and larger. E. Other Electrical Work: In accordance with Division 24. 2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Inserts: Steel case and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods and lugs for attaching to forms. Size to match hanger rod. B. Expansion Anchors: Lead shield or sliding expansion type with machine bolt. Size to match hanger rod. C. Beam Clamps: Steel with clamping bolt and jamb nut, configured to attach securely to beam. D. Clip Angles: Short section of steel angle with suitable fasteners. E. Hanger Rods: Steel all-thread. F. Hangers: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1. 2. G. 2.03 Individual hangers: Adjustable wrought steel ring for piping through 1-1/2". Adjustable wrought steel clevis for piping 2" and larger. Adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roller for hot piping 6" and larger. Chain or perforated strap hangers not permitted. Trapeze: Inverted steel channels with welded pipe spacers. Provide cast iron roller type support for hot piping 6" and larger; other piping may rest directly on trapeze. Size hanger rods one size larger than required for largest pipe on trapeze. Uniformly space hanger rods max. 3' on center. Locate piping on trapeze to allow for insulation and thermal expansion. See SECTION 220700 - PIPING INSULATION. Materials: Metallic pipe hangers shall be of same material as base metal of pipe. SLEEVES, SAFING, AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Sleeves: 1. Round: Steel pipe sized large enough to allow for uninterrupted insulation and for movement. 2. Rectangular: Galvanized steel, reinforced to prevent deformation. B. Safing: 1. Waterproof: Elastic mastic, silicone, etc. 2. Fireproof: Plaster, grout, other material as approved by local authorities. C. Escutcheons 1. Piping: Adjustable nickel-plated, solid or split, flat or dished to suit the application. 2. Ductwork: Fabricated sheet metal. 2.04 VALVES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Apollo, Keystone, Crane, Hammond, Dezurick, Jenkins, Kennedy, Nibco, Powell, Stockman, Grinnell. B. General: All valves of the same type shall be of one manufacturer. Use valves listed with the Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry. C. Gate Valves 1. 2" and smaller: Bronze, union bonnet, rising stem, inside screw, solid wedge, hand wheel, screwed or soldered ends, 150# WSP, 300# WOG. 2. 2-1/2" and larger: iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, OS & Y, bolted solid wedge, hand wheel, flanged ends, 125# WSP, 200# WOG. D. Ball Valves 1. 2" and smaller: Bronze, swing-away design, full port, bronze ball, teflon seat, lever operator, screwed or soldered ends, 150# WSP, 400# WOG. 2. 2-1/2" and larger: Not applicable. E. Plug Cocks 1. 2" and smaller: Bronze, swing disc, solder or screwed ends. 2. 2-1/2" and larger: Iron body, bronze trim, lubricated, flanged ends. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado F. Check Valves 1. Swing check 2" and smaller: Bronze, screwed bonnet, horizontal swing disc, renewable disc and seat, solder or screwed ends, 150# WSP, 300# WOG. G. Drain Valves 1. Bronze, compression stop with nipple and cap or hose thread outlet, 125# WSP. H. Gas Cocks: Corrosion resistant plug, permanently lubricated, non-corrosion bearings, suitable seals for intended service, removable lever operator. 2.05 UNIONS A. Ferrous Piping 1. 2" and smaller: 150# malleable iron ground joint, threaded ends. B. Copper Piping 1. 2" and smaller: Wrought copper in accordance with ANSI B16.22. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MOTORS, STARTERS, AND MISC. ELECTRICAL A. Provide motors of minimum horsepower indicated, complete with starters, etc. where required. See Sections MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION and CONTROLS. B. Comply with the provisions of Division 24. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS A. General: Adequately support piping from building structure, to maintain required grades, to prevent sagging. Support piping independently of equipment so its weight will not be supported by the equipment. Provide sway bracing where necessary. Isolate hangers and supports coming in contact with bare copper pipe; use dielectric hanger connectors or wrap pipe with non-conductive tape. B. Hanger spacing: 1. Schedule of sizes and spacing: Pipe or Tubing Size 1/2" thru 1" 1-1/4" thru 2" 2-1/2" thru 3" 4" thru 8” BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Maximum Spacing (ft.) 6 7 10 14 Minimum ATR Rod Dia. 3/8 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 230500 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2. 3. 4. 5. To provide 1/2" minimum clearance between insulation and adjacent work. Support horizontal cast iron piping near each joint, maximum 5' on center. Support vertical cast iron piping at each floor independently of connecting horizontal piping where practical. Hanger spacing for non-metallic piping; domestic water piping; soil, waste, and vent piping; and storm sewer piping shall be in accordance with above or International Plumbing Code whichever is more stringent. C. Inserts: Use for cast-in-place concrete. Set in place prior to concrete pour. Attach insert to re-bar if insert will carry piping 4" and over. Where concrete will remain exposed, finish inserts flush with exposed surface. D. Expansion anchors: Use for precast and existing concrete. Drill appropriate size hole and securely set anchor. Do not cut stressed concrete reinforcing. Where Architect allows, may drill through concrete slab from below and provide hanger rod with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab. E. Beam clamps: Use for steel beams and joists, clamped in place. F. Clip angles: Use for steel beams, welded in place. Use for wood beams and joists, thrubolted in place with backer plate and lock nut. G. Hanger rods: Suspend from inserts and anchors with jamb nut. Suspend from clamps and angles with top and bottom locknuts. H. Hangers: Suspend from rods with top and bottom lock nuts. Allow for at least 1-1/2" vertical adjustment. 3.03 SLEEVES, SAFING, AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Make penetrations through building elements as follows: 1. New concrete: Use individual sleeves cast in place. Only one pipe or duct to a sleeve; multiple pipes/ducts in a sleeve not allowed. Sleeve for pneumatic control tubing bundles same as for pipes. Extended floor sleeves 2" above finished floor, notched as required for riser clamps. Cut wall sleeves flush with wall. 2. Pre-cast and existing concrete, sleeves not required. Saw cut or core drill concrete as in accordance with paragraph CUTTING AND PATCHING herein. 3. New masonry: Same as new concrete. 4. Existing masonry: Same as existing concrete. 5. Frame: Same as existing concrete. B. Provide safing in annular space between pipe/duct/insulation and sleeve/opening as follows: 1. For un-rated concrete floors and foundation walls use waterproof type. 2. For fire-rated construction use fireproof type for full thickness of the construction. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. 3.04 Provide escutcheons for pipes and ducts passing through walls, floors and ceilings in finished areas. Provide to completely conceal the penetration, to butt tightly against the wall/floor/ceiling and the pipe/duct, and to yield a neatly finished appearance. Install plated escutcheons after wall/floor/ceiling has been painted. VALVES A. Orientation: Install with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Install swing checks horizontally or in upflow vertical piping, not downflow vertical. B. Shut-Off and Isolation: Provide where shown, at inlet and outlet to each piece of equipment, to isolate major horizontal branches, at base of vertical risers. Use gate valves. Ball valves, butterfly valves, or eccentric valves may be used in lieu of gate valves wherever the pressure and temperature ratings are satisfactory for the intended service. May omit where balancing valve can be used for shut-off. C. Balancing: Provide balancing valve where shown and at outlet of each hydronic heat transfer device and coil. D. Drains: Provide where shown, at main shut-off valves, at low points of piping and equipment, to assure complete system drain-down. Locate at accessible points within the piping system. Use drain valves. 3.05 UNIONS A. Provide where shown, at all equipment and control valve connections, for connection to other items requiring removal for service/replacement. B. Provide dielectric type nipples at junctions of dissimilar metals. Dialetric unions are not allowed. 3.06 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Strainers: Provide where shown, at suction to each pump unless pump is protected by strainer in suction diffuser, at inlet to major modulating control valves, at inlet to steam traps (except radiation traps) unless trap is protected by integral strainer, at pressure reducing valves. B. Reducing Valves: Provide where shown. C. Pressure and temperature Relief Valves: Provide where shown and to adequately protect fired and unfired pressure vessels and piping systems designed for operation at reduced pressure. Pipe discharge to a safe location. Do not provide valving between relief valve and system being protected. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 3.07 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Location: Route piping generally as indicated, parallel with building elements, in an orderly manner. Locate concealed unless indicated otherwise. Arrange to conserve headroom and to clear doors, windows, other openings. B. Installation: Install without spring or forcing unless cold-springing is indicated. Make changes in direction with fittings. Provide necessary offsets to accommodate other work and as required for equipment fit-up. Ream and clean prior to joining. Cap open ends to prevent entrance of foreign material. C. Grades: Slope all piping to allow for drainage, minimum 1" in 40' or as prescribed by code or specified in other Division 23 Sections. D. Drains: Provide at low points in water piping. E. Clearances: Allow for application of insulation and for access to valves, vents, drains, unions. Allow for minimum 1/2" clearance between pipes after installation. F. Building Settlement: Provide swing joints, expansion loops, anchors, guides, expansion devices, etc., as necessary to permit free building movement without causing undue pipe stress or damage to building. Pay particular attention to piping crossing building expansion joints and to piping penetrating floors, foundations, and roof. G. Connections: 1. copper: Sweat or brazed as in accordance with applicable Division 15 Sections. 2. Steel: Unless otherwise required: a. 2" and smaller: Screwed joints with full-cut tapered threads. Make up with nontoxic joint compound or teflon tape; apply to male threads only. b. 2-1/2" and larger: Welded joints. c. All sizes: Grooved ends with mechanical couplings. Provide gaskets that are chemically compatible with fluid being conveyed and with the fluid temperature. H. Welding 1. Make changes in direction and intersection of welded lines with welded fittings. Do not miter pipe to form ells and tees. 2. Conform to ANSI B.31. Machine cut and bevel piping ends for V-type joint. Use recommended bevel angles and spacing between ends of pipe to assure full penetration. 3. Architect will visually inspect joints. Any weld suspected as defective will be ordered tested at the Contractor's expense or chipped out full depth and re-welded. 3.08 A. PIPE TESTING New Piping: Test all piping installed under Division 23. Conduct tests prior to concealment or insulating. Notify Architect prior to conducting tests, to allow him to observe test. Provide all BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 6 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado instruments and equipment required to conduct tests. See appropriate Division 15 Sections for testing specifics and pressures. B. Existing Piping: Isolate from test pressures using isolating valves, blind flanges, etc. Repair any existing piping damaged during testing. C. Fixtures, Equipment: Isolate from test pressures if such pressure may damage the fixture/equipment. Use isolation valves, caps, etc. D. Duration: Hold hydrostatic tests for eight hours minimum without pressure loss. Hold air tests for one hour minimum without significant pressure loss. Air test may be substituted for hydrostatic test if approved by Architect. E. Retesting: Correct any work failing the initial test. Retest in accordance with initial test procedures. F. Field Records: Maintain for all tests. Submit to Architect in triplicate. 3.09 A. 3.10 PIPE FLUSHING Flush or rod out piping prior to making final connections, to assure removal of foreign material. Provide temporary connections, valves, etc. as may be required for this purpose. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Provide for all Division 23 work in accordance with Division 2 and the Soils Report. B. Trenching: Verify location of new and existing buried utilities prior to trenching; immediately repair/replace any utilities damaged due to trenching. Saw cut through asphalt and concrete. Over-excavate if required for proper bedding. C. Bedding: Remove rocks and stones from bottom of trench. Backfill and compact overexcavation using suitable material. Shape bedding to allow pipe to bear full length. Hand dig for bells. D. Trace Wires: Provide No. 6 bare copper trace wire in trench alongside any non-conductive piping, to facilitate future location. Terminate at both ends with secure electrical bond to valve box, grade cleanout, manhole frame, similar conductive item. Show terminal locations on asbuilt drawings. E. Backfill: Test piping prior to backfill; where test pressure may cause pipe movement, may backfill over piping keeping joints exposed for inspection. Remove rocks and stones from any backfill material which will be within 6" of pipe or buried ductwork. Backfill to 6" over pipe in at least 3 hand-tamped lifts compacted to the prescribed density. Backfill and compact remainder of trench in accordance with Division 2. F. Surface Restoration: Restore to original grade and condition. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 7 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado G. 3.11 Settlement: Rectify any settlement which occurs during the warranty period. As part of Division 15 warranty, provide any asphalt/concrete patching as required to restore the surface. EQUIPMENT BASES, SUPPORTS, AND MISC. STEEL A. Concrete: Provide housekeeping pads, inertia pads, bases, piers, etc. as shown or required for Division 23 work. B. Steel: Provide as shown or required for Division 15 work. Provide in accordance with AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. 3.12 FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING A. Roof penetrations: Provide roof jack, flashing, and counter flashing as appropriate for the roofing system B. Counterflashing, Safing: For Division 15 work, provide under Division 15. See appropriate Division 23 Sections. 3.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Perform as required for Division 15 work. Keep to a minimum through proper scheduling. Where unavoidable, perform in accordance with applicable Divisions. See also Division 1. B. Cutting: Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or drilling structural elements. Use saw or rotary drill; do not use pneumatic hammer. C. Patching: Seal openings, repair, refinish, restore damaged elements to original conditions. Comply with provisions of applicable Divisions. 3.14 A. ACCESS PANELS Furnish in accordance with Division 8 and with fire rating compatible with ceiling or partition rating. Furnish where indicated and at locations where required for access to concealed valves, dampers, cleanouts, control devices, equipment, other items requiring service/maintenance. Deliver to General Contractor for installation under other Divisions. Provide instructions for location. END OF SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 8 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED At the completion of the mechanical installation, perform testing, adjusting and balancing of all mechanical systems provided under Division 23. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work under this Section shall be performed by Midwest Engineering of Colorado Springs. B. Perform work and report findings in accordance with: 1. ASHRAE Handbook chapter on Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 2. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 1.03 A. 1.04 A. SUBMITTALS Submit detailed balance report in triplicate at completion of work. Include: 1. Instruments used and date of last calibration. 2. Equipment nameplate data. 3. Data sheets showing all measurements taken and the final settings of all adjustable components. 4. System schematics or reduced-scale prints marked to correspond to the data sheets. 5. Commentary on any item not meeting design intent. PROJECT CONDITIONS Verify following conditions before proceeding with work. 1. Installation of the designated system is complete and in full operation. 2. Outside temperature conditions, occupant loads, lighting loads, special equipment requiring extrasensible or ventilation requirements, and solar conditions are within a reasonable range relative to design conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. REPLACEMENT ITEMS Provide replacement sheaves and belts and replacement thermal overload elements which may be required to satisfy the actual job conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. PREPARATION Air Systems: Check: 1. Filters are clean. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.02 Filter leakage. Damper operation and leakage. Duct leakage. Fan rotation. Equipment vibration. ADJUSTING AND BALANCING A. Equipment: Record make, model, size. B. Motors: Record voltage, max allowable and actual amp draw on each phase, thermal overload size, rpm, hp. C. Drives: Adjust so that when the desired speed and belt tension has been established, the variable sheave and the belt tension adjustment shall be at approximately the midpoint of the adjustment range. Record rpm. D. Air Systems: Adjust to CFM indicated and to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. Adjust fan systems and major quantities to within +-5%. Individual air outlets, when one of three of more serve a space, may have a tolerance of 10% from the average. Mark final setting of each balancing device. Record: 1. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers: Ak, velocity, CFM. 2. Fans: Supply CFM, return CFM, outdoor air CFM, exhaust CFM, RPM, SP at fan intake and discharge. 3. Coils: Air temperature entering and leaving, CFM, air pressure drop. 4. Filters: Air pressure drop, CFM. 5. Major Duct Branches and Zones: CFM. E. Controls: In cooperation with Temperature Control Contractor, verify and adjust all control devices for proper operation. 3.03 COMPLETION SERVICES A. Final Check: Make final checks and do any re-balancing as directed. B. Report: Submit Balancing Report as specified above. END OF SECTION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230593 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED Provide insulation as shown and specified herein. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Hazard Classification: Tested as a composite in accordance with ASTM E84 or NFPA 255 or UL723 and so labeled. Max flame spread = 25, max smoke developed = 50. B. Energy Conservation: Comply with applicable energy codes. C. Prohibited Materials: Products or materials containing asbestos are expressly prohibited. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE INSULATION - MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Manville, Certainteed, Owens-Corning, Armstrong. B. Fiberglass: ASTM C547 Type 1. Maximum k/inch = 0.22 at 75 degrees F. All service jacket with self-sealing laps. Pre-molded fitting and valve covers with fiberglass inserts. C. Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric: ASTM C534 Type 1, and ASTM D1056. Maximum k/inch = 0.28 at 75 degrees F. D. All insulation shall have a maximum flame spread of 25, and developed smoke factor of 50 in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2.02 DUCT INSULATION - MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Manville, Certainteed, Owens-Corning. B. Wrap: Fiberglass blanket in accordance with ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B3. R=2.8/inch at 75ºF installed. FSK facing. C. Liner: fiberglass duct liner with coating on air-side surface. R=4.2/inch at 75ºF D. All insulation shall have a maximum flame spread of 25, and developed smoke factor of 50 in accordance with ASTM E 84. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Apply insulation after systems have been tested. B. Comply with manufacturers recommendations regarding ambient and system temperatures and application methods. C. Apply insulation to clean, dry surfaces. D. Apply insulation with sections or edges firmly butted together. E. Run insulation continuous through sleeves and openings in walls and floors. F. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier on cold systems. Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier. Seal all vapor barrier penetrations. G. Repair insulation damaged due to strain or poor workmanship. H. Leave surfaces clean and ready for painting. I. Insulation which has been applied in an unsightly manner will be ordered replaced. 3.02 PIPE INSULATION - INSTALLATION A. General 1. Insulate pipe, fittings and valves. 2. Do not insulate unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, expansion joints. Terminate insulation neatly with insulating and finishing cement troweled on a bevel. 3. Insulated through hangers and supports. Use heavy density insert and sheet metal shield on 2” and larger, sheet metal shield on 1½” and smaller.. 4. For cold piping, seal fitting/valve covers at end and throat. B. Use 1. Fiberglass with longitudinal seams located away from normal lines of sight. 2. Fiberglass with metal jacket secured with draw bands 12" OC and sealed weather tight. For horizontal piping locate longitudinal seam and drawband clamp on underside of pipe. For girth joints in vertical piping, wrap upper jacket section around the lower section. C. Thickness: Insulate piping systems with thickness indicated in Table 3.03C. Insulate entire system unless noted otherwise. Not all piping system types or sizes are necessarily used in this project. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Table 3.03C INSULATION THICKNESS FOR PIPE SIZE RUNOUTS TO 1" 1" TO 1½” 2" TO 4" 5" TO 6" 8" & UP 1½" 1½" 2” 2” 2” 2 Steam Condensate 2” 2" 2” 2” 2" 2 Heating Water 1" 1" 2" 2" 2” 2 Chilled Water 1" 1" 1½" 1½" 1½" 1,2 Condenser Water ½" 2" 2" 2" 2" 2,3 - 1” 1" 1" 1" 1,2 PIPING SYSTEM Steam (<15 psi) Refrigerant Suction NOTES Schedule Notes: 1. 2. 3. 3.03 Maintain integrity of vapor barrier jacket. Insulate all above-ground horizontal lines and all lines in return air plenum. Exterior only with sealed and banded metal jacket. DUCT INSULATION - INSTALLATION A. Duct Liner: Apply liner with 100% adhesive coverage. Butter all raw edges with adhesive. Adhere to manufacturers' recommendations regarding mechanical fasteners and nosings. B. Duct Wrap: 2" thick. Adhere to duct exterior with 100% adhesive coverage. Seal all joints and punctures to maintain integrity of vapor barrier on cold air ducts. C. Duct Board: Fasten to duct with weld pins or stick clips spaced in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, secured with washers. Seal joints, breaks and punctures in cold air ductwork with adhesive reinforced with a 3" wide strip of facing material. D. Insulate ductwork as indicated in Table 3.03D unless specifically indicated otherwise herein or on the drawings. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Table 3.03D DUCTWORK INSULATION REQUIREMENTS NONE REQ’D DUCT SYSTEM TYPE ALL DUCTS EXPOSED IN CONDITIONED SPACE DUCT LINER DUCT WRAP X RECTANGULAR SUPPLY & RETURN AIR X ROUND SUPPLY & RETURN AIR X OUTSIDE AIR X OUTSIDE AIR PLENUMS E. DUCT BOARD X All duct insulation shall be of sufficient thickness to provide minimum R values as indicated in Table 3.03E. Table 3.03E MINIMUM DUCT INSULATION R-VALUES SUPPLY AIR RETURN AIR OUTSIDE BUILDING 8.0 8.0 UNCONDITIONED SPACE OUTSIDE BUILDING INSULATION 8.0 8.0 UNCONDITIONED SPACE INSIDE BUILDING INSULATION 5.0 5.0 RETURN AIR PLENUM 4.2 4.2 DUCT LOCATION E. All exhaust ductwork within 10 feet of exhaust registers shall be insulated with ½” duct liner. Omit all insulation from exhaust ductwork serving Type I or Type II hoods. END OF SECTION HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 23 30 00 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. WORK INCLUDED Furnish and install ductwork and sheetmetal accessories as shown and specified herein. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with applicable NFPA and SMACNA standards, ASHRAE Handbook, UL 181, and UMC. SUBMITTALS In addition to all items scheduled on the Drawings, furnish submittals on all items specified here-in. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. 2.02 DUCTWORK MATERIALS Galvanized Steel 1. Gauge: As prescribed by code. 2. Flat sheets: ASTM A527. 3. Round: a. Fabrication: Pipe lock longitudinal seams with beaded crimp transverse joints secured with sheetmetal screws. b. Fittings: Adjustable 4-segment elbows, manufactured conical tee fittings and taps (saddle taps not permitted), manufactured register boots and stack heads. Flex Duct: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Flexmaster. 2. Classification: NFPA 90A - Class 1, UL 181 labeled. 3. Low pressure: Flexmaster Type 5-Insulated. Factory fabricated assembly consisting of a zinc-coated spring steel helix, seamless inner liner wrapped with a nominal 1" thick one-pound density fiberglass insulation all assembled in a vapor barrier jacket. Rated for pressures to +3" WG. 4. Spin-ins: With balancing damper. DUCTWORK SPECIALTIES A. Balancing Dampers 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dowco, Young Regulator. 2. Construction: Rigid bearings and locking quadrants. Where used in conjunction with duct-mounted coils, provide opposed-blade type with max 2" wide blades. B. Access Doors 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: CESCO. AIR DISTRIBUTION 233000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2. Hinged door with housing frame, sash-type closures, door of two gauges heavier than duct, sponge rubber gaskets cemented in place. C. Flex Connections 1. Ventfabrics Ventglas D. Test Hole. 1. Low velocity ductwork: Drilled hole with friction-fit plastic cap on metal duct and tape closure on fiberglass ductboard. 2. Medium pressure ductwork: Ventlock No. 699 with gasketed threaded removable cap and gasketed base connection at duct wall. E. Manufactured Duct Connection System 1. Ductmate 25 or 35 as applicable. F. Duct Sealants 1. Hardcast Iron-grip 601 cement 2. Hardcast Aluma-grip 701 tape 2.03 GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Anemostat, Agitair, Metal-Aire. B. Sizes, Types: See schedule on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK A. Application: All ductwork is classified as low velocity unless indicated otherwise. B. Fabrication: 1. In accordance with SMACNA and ASHRAE standards for low velocity ductwork. 2. Manufactured duct connection system may be utilized for transverse joints in rectangular galvanized steelductwork. Provide in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Materials: 1. Exposed: Galvanized steel. 2. Concealed: Galvanized steel. D. Flex: Low-pressure type. 3.04 A. DUCTWORK FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION General 1. Fabricate and install to meet job conditions from dimensions taken from jobsite and shop drawings. Transition as required to avoid interferences; maintain required crosssectional area. AIR DISTRIBUTION 233000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2. 3. 4. 5. Fabricate and install so no undue noise or vibration results. Do not provide holes in the duct systems for the installation of hangers, conduit, pipes, etc. Duct dimensions on drawings are clear inside dimension; increase sheetmetal dimensions to accommodate liner. Locate all ductwork concealed unless indicated otherwise. B. Elbows 1. Curved: Center line radius equal to 1-1/2 times the duct width. 2. Square: Fitted with turning vanes. C. Take-Offs: 45° connection at all take-offs in rectangular ductwork. Straight spin-in with damper for round run-outs. D. Hangers and Supports 1. Horizontal ducts: Provide hangers of type and spacing as recommended by SMACNA. 2. Vertical ducts through floors: Provide galvanized steel angles on at least two sides of the duct; fasten securely to duct and floor. E. Balancing Dampers: Provide for proper adjustment and control of air distribution. Mark damper rod to indicate the relative position of the damper blades with respect to the rod. G. Access Doors: Provide in ductwork for access to all automatic dampers, fire dampers, coils, other items requiring maintenance or inspection. Provide 12" x 12" doors where permitted by duct size; where duct is too small provide as large a door as possible. H. Flex Ductwork: Use lengths not exceeding ten feet as necessary to make connection without pinching or kinking. Suspend horizontal runs with 3/4" wide flat steel band at 36" OC. Make end connections with steel draw bands. I. Flex Connections: Provide at inlet and outlet to all fans. J. Test Holes: Provide on branch and main duct, openings through duct walls for the insertion of test equipment. Locate to enable traverse readings per ASHRAE Standards. K. Painting: Where interior of duct is visible through grilles, louvers, etc., or able to be seen thru ceiling grid, paint visible inside portion of duct with flat black paint. L. Seal all joints with duct sealant, tape or cement. END OF SECTION AIR DISTRIBUTION 233000 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 23 34 10 - EXHAUST FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. WORK INCLUDED Provide exhaust systems in accordance with the drawings and this Section to yield a complete exhaust system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL EXHAUST FANS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Loren Cook, Carnes B. Housing: All aluminum with either upblast or radial discharge as indicated by model number, with motor compartment out to the primary air stream, removable cover. C. UL 705 listed D. Inlet: Spun aluminum venturi E. Wheel: Centrifugal, aluminum, statically and dynamically balanced F. Drive: Direct drive or adjustable belt drive as indicated by model number, resiliently mounted, with ball bearing pillow blocks on wheel shaft. G. Motor: Permanently lubricated ball bearing type. H. Accessories: 1. Standard 12" insulated curb 2. Gravity backdraft damper 3. Pre-wired disconnect switch 2.02 CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Loren Cook, Carnes. B. Housing: galvanized steel housing insulated with at least 1/2” of acoustic insulation. Housing to have adjustable mounting brackets. Automatic backdraft damper to be located within duct connector. Duct connector, blower assembly, and wiring plate shall be adjustable for either horizontal or vertical installation. C. Blower unit: shall be removable from housing and will have a polymeric, dynamically balanced centrifugal-type blower wheel. Motor to be permanently lubricated and mounted with resilient antivibration mounts. RPM not to exceed number listed for each model. D. Air delivery shall be no less and sound levels no greater than listed for each model. All air and sound ratings shall be certified by AMCA. Units to be UL and cUL listed. EXHAUST FANS 233410 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2.03 KITCHEN EXHAUST FANS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Captive Aire B. Housing: All aluminum with upblast discharge as indicated by model number, with motor compartment out to the primary air stream, removable cover. C. UL 762 listed D. Inlet: Spun aluminum venturi E. Wheel: Centrifugal, aluminum, statically and dynamically balanced F. Drive: Direct drive or adjustable belt drive as indicated by model number, resiliently mounted, with ball bearing pillow blocks on wheel shaft. G. Motor: Permanently lubricated ball bearing type. H. Accessories: 1. Insulated vented curb to meet code requirements 2. Pre-wired disconnect switch 3. Grease trough PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install per Drawings and manufacturers' recommendations. B. Provide 1 year limited parts warranty END OF SECTION EXHAUST FANS 233410 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 23 36 16 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS - VARIABLE VOLUME PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fan powered terminal units. 1. Parallel flow (variable volume). B. Integral heating coils. 1. Hot water. C. Integral terminal unit controls. 1. Direct digital. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. B. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. C. NFPA 70 - Electric Duct Heaters. D. UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment. E. CUL C22.2 No. 236, Heating and Cooling Equipment. F. ARI 880 - Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standard Rating Conditions for Air Terminals G. ASTM A 527 (Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated Galvanized). H. A-A-1419 or F-F-310 Federal specification (filter element, Air conditioning, Viscousimpingement or Dry type, replaceable), Tested per UL 900. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data sheets indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication. B. Submit product performance data indicating design air flow, minimum static pressure drop, fan operating condition. C. Submit installation, operation and maintenance documentation. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Basis of Design to be Krueger. Alternates will be reviewed with UCCS personnel for approval. B. Insulation shall meet NFPA-90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation and UL-181 requirements for anti-erosion, corrosion and fungus properties. AIR TERMINAL UNITS – VARIABLE VOLUME 233616 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. Hot water coils, when specified, shall be tested for leakage at 250 psig with the coil submerged in water D. The terminal unit shall be ETL listed as a complete assembly. All electrical components shall be UL listed and installed in accordance with the National Electric Code. All electrical components shall be mounted in sheet metal control enclosures. Electrical connections shall be single point. E. Sound power levels shall be ARI certified in accordance with the requirements of ARI-88098. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's parts warranty for one year from unit start-up or eighteen months from unit shipment, whichever is shorter. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. General: Factory assembled, externally powered, horizontal fan powered terminal unit with blower, blower motor, mixing plenum and primary air damper contained in a single unit housing. Unit shall be complete with a damper assembly, flow sensor, externally mounted volume controller, collars for duct connection and all required features. Control box shall be clearly marked with an identification label that lists such information as nominal cfm, maximum and minimum airflow limits, coil type and coil hand, where applicable B. Unit Cabinet: 1. Constructed of 22-gage (20 gage optional) galvanized steel with round inlet collar and rectangular discharge with flanged connection. All primary air inlet collars shall accommodate standard flex duct sizes. 2. Insulated with ½ in. thick, 1.5-lb. equivalent density mat-faced insulation that meets the requirements of UL181 and NFPA-90A. C. Damper Assembly: The control air damper assembly shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with solid shaft rotating in Delrin® bearings. Damper shaft shall be marked on the end to indicate damper position. Damper blade shall incorporate a flexible gasket for tight airflow shutoff and operate over a full 90°. D. Fan(s): Fan shall be of the forward curve, centrifugal type. The fan motor shall be energy efficient design, permanently lubricated, using permanent split capacitor for starting and be specifically designed for use with an SCR fan speed-controller. Motor must have thermal overload protection. The fan motor shaft shall be connected directly to the fan and the entire fan assembly shall be isolated from the unit casing to prevent transmission of vibration. E. Electrical Requirements: AIR TERMINAL UNITS – VARIABLE VOLUME 233616 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Units shall have a single connection for power, and operate on 60 Hz power as shown on the equipment schedule. F. Controls: Units shall have pressure-independent communicating controls, as specified, capable of maintaining required airflow setpoints +/-5% of the unit’s capacity at any inlet pressure up to 6-in. wg. The controllers shall be capable of resetting between factory or field-set maximum and minimum (>350 fpm inlet duct velocity) set points to satisfy the room thermostat demand. The unit shall be equipped with an amplified flow probe located in the unit inlet. Air flow for the pressure independent controller (supplied by others) shall be determined with a factory supplied 12 point total pressure, center averaging cross flow sensor, having a magnification resulting in no greater than 2625 fpm @ 1” developed signal. G. Accessories: Hot Water Heating Coil: Coil shall be mounted in a minimum 20 Ga. Galvanized steel casing with slip and drive discharge connections, and factory mounted on the base unit as shown on the equipment drawings. Coils shall have: a. Aluminum fins (10 ft/in.) bonded to the copper tubes by mechanical expansion. b. Number of coil rows and circuits shall be selected to provide performance as required by the plans. c. Up to 2 rows as shown on equipment drawings or designed on the equipment schedule. Right or left-hand fittings with sweat connection sizes as indicated on equipment drawings. H. Performance: 1. The pressure drop through the units shall not exceed scheduled values, including hot water coils. 2. Acoustical Requirement Unit supplied shall be rated in accordance with ARI 880 certification program at the rated flow rates and pressures. The unit manufacturer shall furnish octave band sound power data for both casing radiated and discharge sound levels with the selected lining and above flow sensor, as tested per ARI Industry Standard 880-98, at the required flow rates and inlet pressures. Both Discharge and Radiated sound data shall result in room Sound Pressure levels not to exceed those listed below, with a tolerance of + 2 dB in any band for less than 20% of the units, when determined in accordance with ARI 885-98 Appendix E with the following listed assumptions: Desired Room Sound Pressure level, dB by Octave Band: Sound Criteria : High Speech Privacy Octave Band : 2 3 4 5 6 7 Room Sound Pressure : 57 53 48 43 37 31 AIR TERMINAL UNITS – VARIABLE VOLUME 233616 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado Application Assumptions Nominal Duct Size = 12. Nominal Duct Ps = 1.0. ----- Discharge Sound Assumptions -----Sound Power Division based on 2 Power Splits 5 Ft. of Lined Duct 5 feet of 8" Flexible duct End Reflection based on a 10" round duct. Room Absorption based on a 2400 CuFt room, 5 Ft from the source: Octave Band : 2 3 4 5 6 7 Room Effect, dB : 5 7 8 9 10 11 ------ Radiated Sound Assumptions -------ARI 885-98 assumes that ceiling located sound sources are not point, but area sources, and the room attenuation is included in the ceiling/space effect, based on the ceiling tile selected. Ceiling: ARI 885-98 Type 2, 10 pcf Mineral Tile Octave Band : 2 3 4 5 6 7 Total Space Effect : 15 17 19 25 30 33 Maximum Allowable Sound Power Based on the assumptions in section 2.3 above, neither Radiated or Discharge Unit sound power shall exceed the following levels at an inlet pressure of 1.0" w.g.: Octave Band : 2 3 4 5 6 7 Radiated Pwl ,dB : 74 71 67 68 67 64 Discharge Pwl ,dB : 79 78 82 90 87 65 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modulation from 100 percent of design air flow to 25 percent nominal air flow for cooling only units and 30 percent for units with heating coils. END OF SECTION AIR TERMINAL UNITS – VARIABLE VOLUME 233616 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 25 00 00 - BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section B. Description C. Approved Control System Contractor D. Quality Assurance E. System Performance F. Submittals G. Warranty H. Ownership of Proprietary Material 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements are a part of these Specifications and shall be used in conjunction with this Section as a part of the Contract Documents. Consult them for further instructions pertaining to this work. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. General: The control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and described in the specifications. B. Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for control of mechanical systems on this project. C. The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the control system data should be limited only by operator password. Multiple users shall have access to all valid system data. An operator shall be able to log onto any workstation on the control system and have access to all appropriate data. D. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will be able to operate under stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall continue to independently operate under control. E. Communication between the control panels and all work-stations shall be over a high speed network. All nodes on this network shall be peers. The operator shall not have to know the panel identifier or location to view or control an object. Application Specific Controllers shall be constantly scanned by the network controllers to update point information and alarm information. BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTROLS 250000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 1.04 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM CONTRACTOR A. Approved Control System Contractor: All Controls shall be installed by Setpoint Systems using Delta Controls with no alternates. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. System Installer Qualifications 1. The Installer shall have an established working relationship with the Control System Manufacturer of not less than three years. 2. The Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's classes on the control system. The Installer shall present for review the certification of completed training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request. 3. The installer shall have an office within 50 miles of the project site and provide 24 hour response in the event of a customer call. Codes and Standards: Meet requirements of all applicable standards and codes, except when more detailed or stringent requirements are indicated by the Contract Documents, including requirements of this Section. 1. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed. 2. National Electrical Code -- NFPA 70. 3. Federal Communications Commission -- Part J. 4. ASHRAE/ANSI 135-1995 (BACnet) 5. Pikes Peak Regional Building Code. C. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. D. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers' standard specification data sheets on all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until submittals have been reviewed by the Engineer and Owner for conformity with the plan and specifications. Six (6) copies are required. All shop drawings shall be done on AutoCAD, and provided to the Owner on a compact disk. B. Project Record Documents: Upon completion of installation submit three (3) copies of record (as-built) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and include: BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTROLS 250000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. 1. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. 2. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manual - These shall be as-built versions of the submittal product data. Training Manuals: The Contractor shall provide a course outline and training manuals for all training classes at least six weeks prior to the first class. The Owner reserves the right to modify any or all of the training course outline and training materials. Review and approval by Owner and Engineer and shall be completed at least 3 weeks prior to first class. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warrant all work as follows: 1. Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. Control System failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge or reduction in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours. 1.08 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL A. All project developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These include but are not limited to: 1. Project graphic images 2. Record drawings 3. Project database 4. Job-specific application programming code 5. All documentation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Acceptable Manufacturers B. Operator Interface C. System Software D. Building Controllers E. Custom Application Controllers F. Application Specific Controllers G. Communications BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTROLS 250000 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado H. Input/Output Interface I. Auxiliary Control Devices 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable systems are: CONTROL SYSTEM MANUFACTURER Delta Controls with no alternates B. The Contractor shall use only listed manufacturers products as shown in section 1 of this division. When a product or component is referred to by manufacturer's name and/or model number, the Contractor shall use only that product. 2.03 OPERATOR INTERFACE A. Operator Interface. Existing Control System B. Hardware. Existing Control System C. System Software: Existing Control System 2.04 SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. B. System Security 1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names. 2. Passwords shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system manager. 3. User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to ten (10) events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each member. Each schedule shall consist of the following: 1. Weekly Schedule 2. Exception Schedules 3. Holiday Schedules 4. Optimal Start/Stop C. Alarm Reporting. The operator shall be able to determine the action to be taken in the event of an alarm. Alarms shall be routed to the appropriate work-stations based on time and other conditions. An alarm shall be able to start programs, be logged in the event log, printed, generate custom messages graphics. BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTROLS 250000 - 4 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado D. Remote Communications. The system shall have the ability to notify the owner in the event of an alarm. Interface shall be web based. E. PID Control. A PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with direct or reverse action and anti-wind-up shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to position an output or stage a series of outputs. The controlled variable, setpoint, and PID gains shall be user-selectable. The set-point shall optionally be chosen to be a reset schedule. F. Staggered Start. This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. The order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is started, along with the time delay between starts shall be user- selectable. G. System Calculations. Provide software to allow instantaneous power (e.g. KW), flow rates (e.g. L/s [GPM]) to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data. Provide an algorithm that calculates a sliding-window KW demand value. Provide an algorithm that calculates energy usage and weather data (heating and cooling degree days). These items shall all be available for daily, previous day, monthly and the previous month. H. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output points shall be protected from short cycling. This feature shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected. 2.05 BUILDING CONTROLLERS A. General. Provide Building Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, stand-alone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the global strategies described in System software section. 2. The controller shall provide a communications port for connection of the Portable Operators Terminal using Point to Point BACnet physical/data link layer protocol or a connection to the inter-network. 3. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. 4. BACnet. The Building Controller shall use the Read (Initiate) and Write (Execute) Services as defined in Clauses 15.5 and 15.8, respectively, of ASHRAE Standard 135-95, to communicate with BACnet objects in the internetwork. Objects supported shall include: Analog input, analog output, binary input, binary output, device. B. Communications. Each Building Controller shall reside on a BACnet inter-network using the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) or ARCNET (ASTM 878.1) Physical/Data Link layer protocol. Each Building Controller shall also perform routing to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers. C. Memory. The Building Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTROLS 250000 - 5 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado 2.06 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS A. B. 2.07 General. Provide Custom Application Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, stand-alone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the local strategies described in System software section. 2. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 Type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 65 C (- 40 F to 150 F). 2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 Type rated enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C (32 F to 120 F). APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS A. B. General. Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. They are not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of the equipment they are designed to serve. 1. Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network. 2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 Type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 65 C (- 40 F to 150 F). 2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 Type rated enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C (32 F to 120 F). 2.08 COMMUNICATIONS A. This project shall comprise a BACnet inter-network. All PC Workstations and Building Controller components shall meet ASHRAE / ANSI Standard 135-1995, BACnet. B. Each BACnet device shall operate on the BACnet physical/data link protocols specified for that device as defined earlier in this section C. The controls Contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers necessary for the inter-network. BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTROLS 250000 - 6 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado D. All Building Controllers shall have a communications port for connections with the operator interfaces. This may be either an RS-232 port for Point to Point connection or a network interface node for connection to the Ethernet or ARCNET network. E. Remote operator interface via a 9600 or faster baud modem shall allow for communication with any and all controllers on this network as described in the following section. F. Communications services over the internetwork shall result in operator interface and value passing that is transparent to the internetwork architecture. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP A. Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible. B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. C. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by chapter 1 article 100 part A of the NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service. D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds. E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices. F. PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 4.01 PARALLEL FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNITS WITH DDC CONTROLS A. Occupied Cycle 1. Intermittent Fan Control - As the space temperature falls below cooling setpoint, the terminal unit shall modulate to its minimum cooling CFM. Units shall interlock the fan cycle with the Kitchen Ventilation System to provide makeup air during kitchen operation. Upon a drop in temperature and/or unit CFM, the parallel fan will be energized. Upon a further decrease in space temperature, the terminal unit will modulate to heating minimum CFM. The heating will then be staged on as follows: a. B. Hot water heat - Stage on heat with a 1 degree interval per stage. Unoccupied Cycle 1. The air valve shall drive closed. The fan and heat shall cycle to maintain a reduced space temperature. BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTROLS 250000 - 7 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado C. D. Unit Diagnostics - The following is unit diagnostics information, either standard or optional as listed. 1. Discharge Air Temperature - A temperature sensor in the discharge air stream shall provide information to the BAS or service tool. 2. Filter Maintenance Timer - The ASC shall have the ability to sum the total fan run hours of the fan coil unit. When the sum reaches a configurable threshold the ASC will send an alarm to the BAS suggesting that the filter be changed in the unit. If the timer is set to 0 then this function will be disabled. 3. Zone Sensor Failure - If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor module it shall be fed back to the BAS. Zone sensor failure shall cause the unit to shutdown. 4. Manual Output Test - The ASC shall have a push button on the board to allow local troubleshooting. When the button is depressed it will cycle the unit logically through the outputs as well as clear any diagnostics. Zone Sensor Operation 1. Each zone sensor shall use a thermister element to measure the actual zone temperature. If the zone sensor has a setpoint knob, the setpoint shall only be used by the ASC if there is no communication value being passed from a BAS. 2. Fan Switch - A 4 position fan switch ( off, low,high,auto ) shall be used to control the fan speeds of the Blower coil. The fan speeds shall only be used by the ASC if there is no communicated value being passed from a BAS. 3. Timed Override ( TOV ) On/Cancel - The zone sensor shall issue a timed override when the on button is pressed. When the on button is pressed and the unit is in the unoccupied mode, the ASC shall activate the timed override signal for 120 minuts ( Adjustible ). The timed override signal shall cause the ASC to transition to the occupied mode. When the cancel button is pressed, the timed override period will be set back to zero and the ASC shall return the unit to the unoccupied mode. Pressing either button shall not affect the zone temperature reported by the ASC. 4. Communications Jack - A RJ-11 communications jack shall be provided on the zone sensor. This shall act as a service tool connection. E. Data Sharing - The ASC shall have the ability to share data directly with other ASC's without passing the information through a BAS. This will allow several units to be slaved to a single unit and zone sensor. The master ASC shall share the same zone setpoint, zone temperature, mode, and fan speed with the slave ASC's. END OF SECTION BUILDING SYSTEMS CONTROLS 250000 - 8 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 26 00 00 – BASIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit for following a. Wiring devices b. Disconnect switches and enclosed circuit breakers c. Switchboards and panelboards d. Motor Starters and controllers e. Lighting fixtures and associated control equipment f. Emergency lighting packs g. Fire alarm & detection equipment 2. Provide following information for each item of equipment a. Catalog Sheets. b. Installation instructions. c. Manufacturer's name and catalog number 3. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data. B. Shop Drawings – to include manufacturer’s drawings 1. Switchboards and panelboards 2. Motor control centers 3. Light Pole and pole base design C. Closeout Submittals 1. Operations & Maintenance Manual Data a. Provide operating and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment submitted under Product Data. b. Include copy of approved shop drawings. c. Provide part numbers and ordering information for all replaceable parts and accessories. 2. Manufacturer’s warranty information identified for each item of equipment installed whether submitted upon or not. 1.02 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified. 2. Material and equipment provided shall be new, meet standards of NEMA or UL. UL listed and registered equipment shall bear the label required for it listing or registration. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. 3.01 INSTALLATION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado A. Mounting Heights 1. Unless otherwise indicated, mount center of outlets or boxes at following heights above finish floor or above finished grade as applicable a. Thermostats - 4’ 6” unless otherwise indicated on mechanical drawings. b. Remote Sensor Outlet - 4’ 6” unless otherwise other wise indicated on mechanical drawings. c. Outdoor Condensing Unit Disconnects - Same height as top of unit to top of disconnect. d. Rooftop Unit Disconnects – not less than 3’ 0” and not greater than 5’ 0” to center of handle. d. Other Motor Disconnects - 5’ 0" to center of handle. e. Distribution Panels - 6’ 6" to top of enclosure except where panel length exceeds 6’ 0”. f. Receptacles - 1’ 6” indoors; 2’ 0” outdoors. g. Switches and light dimmer controls - 4’ 0”. h. Wall-Mounted Exit Lights - 7' 6". i. Telephone Board - 5’ 0”. j. Voice/Data Outlets - 1’ 6”. k. Telephone Outlet (wall type) - 4’0”. l. TV Distribution Outlets - 1’ 6”. 2. Refer special situations to Architect before rough-in and locate outlet under his direction. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests - Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify Architect prior to test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION BASIC REQUIREMENTS 260000 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 26 05 19 – WIRING METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SECTION REQUIREMENTS Summary: Building wires and cables and associated splices, connectors, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less, and twisted-pair cable; and raceways and boxes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING AND CABLES A. Building Wires and Cables: Type XHWN/THWN copper conductor. B. Connectors and Splices: Wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, and type and class for application and for service indicated. C. Single Conductor Plenum Coaxial: 75-ohm characteristic impedance, solid bare copper central conductor, foamed Teflon dielectric, 100 percent coverage tinned-copper, double-braid shield, Teflon jacket, suitable for installation in air-handling spaces. D. Twisted Pair: No. 22 AWG tinned-copper conductors; PVC insulation; overall aluminum/polyester shield and No. 22 AWG tinned-copper drain wire; PVC jacket. E. Twisted-Pair Plenum: No. 24 AWG, 7-strand, tinned-copper conductors; Teflon insulation; overall aluminum/polyester shield and No. 22 AWG tinned-copper drain wire; Teflon jacket; suitable for use in air-handling spaces. 2.02 RACEWAYS A. Conduit: Comply with the following: 1. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit: ANSI C80.6. 3. Electrical metallic Tubing: ANSI C80.3. 4. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40. B. Wireways: Hinged type, with manufacturers standard finish. C. Surface Metal Raceway: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating suitable for painting. D. Surface Nonmetallic Raceway: 2-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture and manufacturer's standard color. E. Outlet and Device Boxes: UL listed and labeled sheet metal boxes. F. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. G. Pull and Junction Boxes: Small sheet metal boxes. 2.03 ENCLOSURES WIRING METHODS 260519 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado A. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, steel enclosure with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. Finish inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. B. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, except where another Type is indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATIONS A. Install wires and cables according to the NECA's "Standard of Installation." B. Remove existing wire from raceway before pulling in new wire and cable. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack conductor at each outlet. D. Outdoors Wiring Methods: As follows: 1. Exposed: Rigid or intermediate metal conduit. 2. Concealed: Rigid or intermediate metal conduit. 3. Underground, Single Run: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 4. Underground, Grouped: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. E. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid or Motor-Driven Equipment): Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. F. Indoors Wiring Methods: As follows: 1. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid or Motor-Driven Equipment): Flexible metal conduit, except in wet or damp locations use liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. 2. Use armored cable and nonmetallic sheathed cable in applications allowed by NFPA 70. 3. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 4. Exposed: Electrical metallic tubing or rigid nonmetallic conduit. 5. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing, electrical nonmetallic tubing, or rigid nonmetallic conduit. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except in damp or wet locations use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel. 7. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 8. Conceal conduit and electrical metallic tubing, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. G. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceway and suitable for use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle third of the slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 1-inch (25-mm) concrete cover. I. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members, and follow the surface contours as much as practical. J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. WIRING METHODS 260519 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of the pull wire. L. Install raceway sealing fittings and locate at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings where required by the NEC. M. Stub-up Connections: Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. N. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1800 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use liquid-tight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. O. Install a separate green ground conductor in surface metal raceway from the junction box supplying the raceway to receptacle or fixture ground terminals. END OF SECTION WIRING METHODS 260519 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 26 22 00 – TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each transformer, including dimensional plans view electrical rooms, sections, and elevations showing minimum clearances, installed devices, and material lists. B. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Product certificates, signed by manufacturer of transformers certifying that their products comply with the specified requirements. D. Product Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's design and routine factory tests required by the referenced standards. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A firm member of NEMA who is regularly engaged in manufacturing components that comply with the requirements of these Specifications and that have been used on at least five projects of similar size and scope as this Project B. Field Testing Organization Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organization-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated. C. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." D. ANSI/IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/IEEE Standard including C2, "National Electrical Safety Code," and C57.12.80, "Terminology for Power and Distribution Transformers." E. UL Listing and Labeling: Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL. F. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Compliance (NRTL): Items provided under this section shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL A. Transformers: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled units of types specified, having characteristics and ratings as indicated on drawings. Units shall be designed for 60 Hz service. B. Cores: Grain oriented, non-aging silicon steel. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado D. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE, DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA Standard ST 20 "Dry-Type" Transformers for General Applications." B. Windings: 2 winding type. Three phase transformers shall use one coil per phase in primary and secondary. C. Provide aluminum windings. D. Sound Level: Sound levels shall not exceed the following: 150 KVA and below, 50 db; above 150 KVA, 60 db. E. Transformers shall have the following features and ratings: 1. Enclosure: Indoor, ventilated, drip proof in electric rooms. 2. Enclosure: Outdoor, ventilated raintight, NEMA 3R in concourses. 3. Insulation Class: 185°C class for 37½ KVA transformers or smaller; 220°C class for transformers larger than 37½ KVA. 4. Insulation Temperature Rise: 150°C maximum rise above 40°C, for 220°C class insulation; 115°C maximum rise for 185°C class insulation. 5. Taps: For transformer 3 KVA and larger, full capacity taps in high-voltage winding as follows: a. 3 KVA through 30 KVA: Four 2-½% taps, two above and two below normal voltage. b. 30 KVA through 500 KVA: Four 2½ percent taps, two above and two below rated normal voltage. c. 500 KVA through 1000 KVA: Four 2½ percent taps, two above and two below rated normal voltage. F. Accessories: As follows: 1. Wall mounting brackets: Manufacturers standard brackets for transformers sized up to 15 KVA where wall mounting is indicated on drawings. 2. Core and coil assembles 30 KVA and larger to be mounted on rubber vibration isolators on concrete pads. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for cooling air circulation. B. Identify transformers in accordance with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torquetightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.02 EQUIPMENT BASES TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows: 1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4-inches high and 2-inches larger END OF SECTION TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 3 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 26 24 16 – PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submit Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS A. Surface mounted, NEMA PB 1, Type 1. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity. Feed-through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated. B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1; no tandem circuit breakers; single handle for multi-pole circuit breakers. C. Fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate specified fuses, handle lockable. D. Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination controller. E. Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination contactor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1. Indicate installed circuit loads on a circuit directory after balancing panelboard loads. B. Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four empty conduits from panelboard into accessible or designated ceiling space and four empty conduits into raised floor or slab space. C. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups, bundle and wrap with wire ties. D. Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests stated in NETA ATS. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 26 24 26 – WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submit Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DEVICES A. General Purpose Wiring Devices: Comply with NEMA WD1. B. Color: Ivory. C. Receptacles: UL 498, heavy-duty grade except as indicated otherwise. D. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles: UL 943, feed-through type, with integral NEMA 520R duplex receptacle; for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter. E. Snap Switches: Quiet-type ac switches, 120/277 V, 20 A, complying with UL 20. F. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable slide, singlepole with soft tap or other quiet switch. G. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, compatible with dimmer ballasts and capable of consistent dimming to a maximum of 10 percent of full brightness. Include trim potentiometer. H. Wall Plates, Finished Areas: Smooth plastic, fastened with metal screws having heads matching plate color. I. Wall Plates, Unfinished Areas: Galvanized steel with metal screws. J. Floor Service Fittings: Modular, above-floor, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. K. Multi-outlet Assemblies: Comply with UL 5. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure. B. Mount devices flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates. C. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. D. Install wall plates when painting is complete. WIRING DEVICES 262426 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES 262426 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 26 28 16 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 – GENERAL (not applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SWITCHES A. Enclosed, Non-fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle. B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate specified fuses, enclosure consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with 2 padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 2.02 A. CIRCUIT BREAKERS Enclosed, Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with lockable handle. 1. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated and interrupting rating to meet available fault current. 2. Circuit Breakers, 200 A and Larger: Trip units interchangeable within frame size. 3. Circuit Breakers, 400 A and Larger: Field-adjustable, short-time and continuous-current settings. 4. Current-Limiting Trips: Where indicated, let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, Class RK-5. 5. Enclosure: NEMA AB 1, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. TESTING Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests stated in NETA ATS. END OF SECTION ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 26 29 13 – MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submit Product Data. B. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller with the ratings and characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required control sequence, and the duty cycle of the motor and load. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROLLERS AND ACCESSORIES A. Manual Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A with toggle action and overload element. B. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, non-reversing, across the line, unless otherwise indicated; with integral control transformer. C. Combination Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and fusible disconnect switch. D. Overload Relay: Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of specific motor to which they connect, and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. E. Multi-speed Motor Controller: Match controller to motor type, application, number of speeds, and having compelling relay, alternating relay, and decelerating relay. F. Reduced-Voltage Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, matching type of motor and load. G. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Use fractional-horsepower manual controllers for single-phase motors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Install independently mounted motor-control devices. C. Locate controllers within sight of motors controlled. D. Install indicated fuses in each fusible switch. MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262913 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado E. Connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and automatic control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in the hand position. F. Connect selector switches with motor-control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.02 A. TESTING Perform visual and mechanical inspections, and electrical tests stated in NETA ATS. END OF SECTION MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262913 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 26 51 00 – INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SECTION REQUIREMENTS Submit Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES Luminaires: See Lighting Fixture Schedule. B. Electronic Ballasts: UL listed and labeled. High Frequency, with less than 20% total harmonic distortion. Energy saving type. Ballast voltage to match system voltage. C. Magnetic Ballasts: To be used only where indicated. UL listed and labeled. HPF, R, P rated with CBM certification and sound rating A. Energy saving type. Ballast voltage to match system voltage. D. Lamps: Shall be provided for all luminaires of the type indicated on the drawings. Wattage, color temperature and color rendering index as indicated on drawings. 1. Approved manufacturers: Philips, Osram-Sylvania PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Interface with other work: Obtain symmetrical arrangement of fixtures in acoustic tile ceiling. Ensure light coves are properly painted before installation of light fixtures. B. Securely mount fixtures. Support fixtures weighing 50 lbs or more from building framing or structural members. C. Fasten lay-in fluorescent fixtures to ceiling suspension system on each side with bolts, screws, rivets, or clips. In addition, connect lay-in fixtures weighing less than 50 lbs with wire hangers, which may be slightly slack, to building framing or structural members. Make final conduit connections to lay-in fluorescent fixtures with specified flexible conduit or flexible fixture whips. D. Where fluorescent fixtures are shown installed end to end, provide suitable connectors or collars to connect adjoining units to appear as a continuous unit. E. Where recessed fixtures are to be installed, provide openings, plaster rings, etc, of exact dimensions for such fixtures to be inserted in openings. Terminate circuits for recessed fixtures in an extension outlet box near fixture and connect with specified flexible conduit. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado F. Install lighting track as indicated on the drawings. Track consisting of multiple sections shall be aligned straight and true without bends or twists. Provide all necessary joiners, couplers, end feeds, etc. as required. END OF SECTION INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 2 University of Colorado, Colorado Springs Pub Renovation Colorado Springs, Colorado SECTION 27 00 00 - COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. The UCCS Information Technology Department (IT) should be consulted at each stage of the design process. IT will review all specs produced for the project. B. Questions should be referred to the Information Technology Department. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS & EXECUTION A. Per UCCS Communications standards. B. EIA/TIA 569 Commercial Buildings Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces C. EIA/TIA 578A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. END OF SECTION COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00 - 1